JP2022001174A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase interest of a game.SOLUTION: A performance period of a special development performance is longer than that of a particular development performance. The special development performance includes a first performance in which the visibility of a performance image is reduced, a second performance executed after the first performance in which pre-stage information can be visually displayed, and a third performance executed after the second performance in which post-stage information having a higher degree of emphasis than that of the pre-stage information can be visually displayed. The period from the execution of the particular development performance to the notification to be controlled to be in an advantageous state is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development performance to the notification to be controlled to be in the advantageous state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the conventional gaming machine, a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed in the image display device, and based on the display mode of the meter being level 4, a plurality of super reach Some of the reach effects are performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-221121

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that only one of the reach effects of a plurality of super reach is executed based on the change of the display mode of the meter to level 4, and the game entertainment cannot be improved. There is.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and FIG. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display is displayed to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
As the development suggestion effect, the development suggestion effect execution means performs the special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect. It is feasible in any case (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η. , The part where the meter effect can be executed while the reach effect A is being executed and the reach effect B is being executed),
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized in that the second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the player's special development effect is executed by the special development suggestion effect. Further, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a player is urged to launch a gaming ball to the right by operating a ball launching handle during execution of a jackpot start effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575. Some were configured to give right-handed instructions. However, there is still room for improvement in the instruction to urge the player to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction, and in view of this point, the instruction to urge the player to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction is given. There is a demand for a gaming machine that can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display is displayed to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized in that the second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a time saving loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the effect when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the first stage effect and the second stage effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image display device. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a meter effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the meter effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st timing to the 5th timing in each fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reach production E development suggestion effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a branch destination suggestion effect decision process. (A) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reach effect G development suggestion effect decision process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach effect determination ratio at the time of a big hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach effect determination ratio at the time of loss, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between the reach effect C and the reach effect D. (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ at the time of a big hit and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It is explanatory drawing of the difference of the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variation pattern of reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the chance up effect decision processing. It is explanatory drawing of the feasibility period of the chance up effect in each reach effect. It is explanatory drawing of the production which can be executed as a chance up production. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the effect pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in each reach effect. be. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change rate of the display mode of an active display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modification. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the chance up effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the length of the revival effect in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing during a hit fluctuation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the parent table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine when it recovers from the electric power failure during the fanfare production by hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine when it recovers from the electric power failure during one round of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine in the case of recovering from the electric power cutoff during the round after one round of big hits at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine when it recovers from a power failure during 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine in the case of recovering from the electric power cutoff during the round after 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine in the case of recovering from a power failure during the round after 3 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine when it recovers from a power failure during 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine in the case of recovering from the electric power cutoff during the round after 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine when it recovers from the electric power failure during the final round of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine when it recovers from the electric power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting special figure 1.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative pattern) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("missing reach") that is not a big hit combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power supply switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 029SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The feature unit 029SG includes the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG.

The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The effect period of the second suggestion effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is the execution of the reach effect A. The part that is set longer than the length L1 of the period),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the second suggestion effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute the development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if the special development effect is not executed, the first suggestion effect is performed. 2 It is possible to surely draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the control of the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect In the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the meter effect is determined, and in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, the portion for executing the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect) is provided.
The means for executing the development suggestion effect is
As the development suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed both during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, when the reach effect A is being executed in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, the super reach β, the super reach δ, the super reach ζ, and the super reach η. The part where the meter effect can be executed while the reach effect B is being executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the player's special development effect is executed by the special development suggestion effect during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect. can.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects.
When the special suggestion effect is executed without executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the development effect execution means sets the special development effect before the special suggestion effect is executed. It can be executed as a three-development pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed. At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once, and the high expectation reach production development notification production is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed, the player is focused on whether or not the special development effect is executed and the special suggestion effect with high expectation is executed. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
During the period from the execution of the special development effect to the execution of the special suggestion effect and the notification that the special suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the third suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed. It is longer than the period until it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the reach effect is from the high expectation reach effect development notification effect start timing. The length L13 of the period until the end timing of I (notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F. The part that is done),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by prolonging the period until the notification when the special development effect with high expectation is executed, the expectation controlled to the advantageous state can be effectively enhanced.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and FIG. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, the portion for executing the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect) is provided.
The development suggestion effect execution means includes a special development suggestion effect (for example, a meter effect) that suggests the execution of the special development effect by changing the effect mode stepwise, and the effect mode changing stepwise. It is possible to execute a special development suggestion effect (for example, reach performance E output development suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the special development effect.
The rate at which the effect mode changes to a specific number of stages in the special development suggestion effect is higher than the rate at which the effect mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 11-24 and 11-54). As described above, in the meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included), whereas in the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image is displayed. Part that changes in two stages),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the first suggestion effect in which the special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which the special development suggestion effect is executed, and the special development in the special development suggestion effect. Since it is easier to change to a specific number of stages than a suggestion effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not it changes to a specific number of stages, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect.
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ. In the variable display in the variable pattern, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period L6a),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the special development effect is executed, the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect, is executed, and after the execution of the special development effect is suggested, the fourth suggestion effect is executed. Since it is possible to suggest for a longer period of time than it is executed, it is possible to improve the production interest of the special development suggestion production.

The gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect). The E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is recognized that the execution of the special development suggestion effect during the execution of the second suggestion effect informs the player that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above.

The gaming machine according to the ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
It is an advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a chance-up effect) that suggests that the effect result of the suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the suggestion effect, and constitutes the advantageous result suggestion effect. The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31, and then the variable display shown in FIG. 10). The part that executes the middle production process) is provided.
The number of times the configuration effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is executed is larger than the number of times the configuration effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-34). As described above, during the execution of the reach effect F, a total of three effects are displayed, that is, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are displayed as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. While it is feasible (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U), while the reach effect A is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red as an effect that constitutes the chance-up effect. A total of two effects of the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the part where the chance-up effect can be executed by pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the configuration effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of executions of the configuration effect when the second suggestion effect is executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-34). As described above, while the reach effect E is being executed, a total of two effects, such as the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, can be executed as the effects constituting the chance-up effect (chance-up effect is changed to pattern S and pattern Q). While the reach effect B is being executed, there are a total of three effects that constitute the chance-up effect: the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200. The part where the effect can be executed (the part where the chance-up effect can be executed by pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the special development effect is executed before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified and the third suggestion effect is further executed, the first suggestion effect is executed. When the third suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the configuration effect is executed increases, so that the player can more appropriately pay attention to the effect result of the third suggestion effect. 2 In the case where the special development effect is executed and the fourth suggestion effect is further executed after being notified that the effect is not controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the effect of the suggestion effect, the composition effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed. By setting the number of times of execution of to be equal to or less than the number of times of execution of the configuration effect when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the effect result of the fourth suggestion effect. You can improve the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect.
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means can execute the advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a chance-up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common aspect.
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-12, the reach title). The part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display and the movement of the movable body 32 is performed in any of the reach effects A to the reach effect F).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect while suppressing the increase in the number of modes of the advantageous result suggestion effect. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth or tenth aspect.
The suggestion effect executing means can display an image corresponding to the expectation degree corresponding to the expectation degree of the suggestion effect when executing the suggestion effect, and the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed on the expectation degree corresponding image. (For example, as shown in the modification 029SG-5, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, they are displayed together with the reach title image. The part that changes the display mode of the expectation image showing the jackpot expectation (increasing the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the expectation-corresponding image changes with the execution of the advantageous result suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the attention to the expectation-corresponding image, so that the player can accurately determine the expectation of the suggestion effect. Can be recognized by.

The gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first to eleventh forms.
A specific image suggestion effect (for example, a modification) that is different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the specific image (for example, active display) displayed during the suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state. As shown in FIGS. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1 as a specific image suggestion effect executing means (for example, an active display effect provided in the display area of the image display device 5) capable of executing the specific image suggestion effect execution means (for example, the active display effect shown in Example 029SG-1). The display area 029SG005F is provided with a portion in which the active display is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes and the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in).
The specific image suggestion effect executing means can execute a common specific image suggestion effect in common in any of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, the active display is a white circle, Blue circle, red circle can be displayed),
The ratio of the common specific image suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is executed after the special development effect is executed. It is lower than the ratio at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as a modified example 029SG-1, variable display as an effect result of the reach effect A. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect F is executed before the result is notified, the active display is displayed during the execution of the reach effect A. The rate at which the aspect changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape P2 is that the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect F is a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape. The rate of change to P3 is lower than P3),
The ratio of the common specific image suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is the ratio of the special development effect being executed in the second development pattern. Is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect (eg, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as variant 029SG-1). The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect result of the reach effect B. The display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed and the reach effect E is further executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified. The rate of change from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is higher than P1),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and the third suggestion effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestion effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize this in advance, and in the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect, the common specific image suggestion effect is appropriately executed according to the degree of expectation, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect.
The specific image suggestion effect executing means changes the display mode of the specific image from the first mode (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to a second mode (for example, a second mode) having a higher expectation than the first mode. Can be varied into any of a number of embodiments (red circle), including
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect after the development effect is executed (. For example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect F is a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle. The ratio P3 that changes to the shape is set higher than the ratio P2 that the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect A, and the super reach ζ. In the variable display of the variation pattern of, the ratio P1 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E is active during the execution of the reach effect B. The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the white circle or blue circle changes to the red circle),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and the display mode of the specific image is changed to the second mode before the development effect. It is possible to reduce the risk of deterioration of the game entertainment due to the person's recognition in advance that the degree of expectation is high.

The gaming machine according to the 14th aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the 12th or 13th aspect.
When the special suggestion effect is executed without executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the development effect execution means sets the special development effect before the special suggestion effect is executed. It can be executed as a three-development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, high expectations are placed from the timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed. Degree reach production The part where the development notification production is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect before the special suggestion effect in the third development pattern is the display of the specific image after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, as shown in the modified example 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display is before the start of the reach effect I. The rate of change P5 from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of reach effect I. Ratio to be set higher than P6),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image is changed to the second mode before the special suggestion effect, so that the player can easily recognize that the special suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 12 to 14.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14).
A decidable means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17) that can determine that the development effect is executed when the variable display is started.
Regarding the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage, the CPU 103 determines that the development effect is executed before the determination means is determined (for example, in the winning random value determination process of the modified example 029SG-4). When the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, which of the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α to super reach λ, is executed (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display). The part that determines whether it is) and
Equipped with
In the specific image suggestion effect executing means, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect is executed and the special development effect being executed are executed based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, in the modified example 029SG-4, a triangle, a quadrangle, a star shape, etc. are provided in addition to the circle as the display mode of the hold storage table display, and any of the hold storage displays can be executed. Reach production E, reach production F, reach production G, reach production H, or reach production I depending on whether the shape is displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the specific image suggestion effect even before the start of the variable display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. , Reach effect C), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G), and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects. The part where the CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, super reach). In the variable display of the variation pattern of κ, the part where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D), the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed. After being notified that the effect is not controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the fluctuation of the super reach θ. In the variable display of the pattern, the development effect execution means (for example, the effect control) which is the part where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D). (Part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10) and
In the first development pattern, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIGS. 11-9) before the special development effect is executed is shown in FIG. The part that executes the effect processing during the variable display shown) and
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect C).
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the super reach κ. In the variable display of the variation pattern of, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the variation pattern of θ, the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and then the reach effect G is executed. Part),
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9). In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed and the reach effect H is further executed),
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variable display result is In the case of a big hit, that is, when the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination ratio of the super reach κ big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is variable. Reach effect G development notification effect is executed during display Super reach θ Higher than the determination rate of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7)),
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect G development notification effect. The part that is set longer than L8),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
The ratio of the special development effect being executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the first suggestion effect and the ratio of the special development effect being executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the second suggestion effect. Different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), when the reach effect C is executed, the rate at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect. Is a part higher than the ratio at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect when the reach effect D is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the production can be diversified by the combination of the type of suggestion production and the type of development production, and the suggestion production and the development production can have a predetermined relationship, so that the suggestion production and the development production can be related. You can improve the production of.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means capable of executing the development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is provided. The part where the pre-effect is executed from the timing before, and the part where the pre-effect is executed from the timing before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means can execute the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-51). , The part where the pre-production of the common mode is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether the special development production or the specific development production is executed as the development production while raising the attention to the development production by executing the development pre-production. You can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of the pattern Z displaying the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) and a specific development suggesting the execution of the specific development effect. A suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of a pattern Y displaying the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestion effect (for example) that suggests execution of both the special development effect and the specific development effect. , The branch destination suggestion effect of the pattern X that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X in the image display device 5 and the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the branch destination effect shown in FIGS. 11-27). A portion for executing the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the determination process).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the special development suggestion effect, the specific development suggestion effect, and the common development suggestion effect is executed as the development suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects.
The second development is more than the first difference, which is the difference between the ratio at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern and the ratio at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 (for example). As shown in D), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach. When the variable display result becomes a big hit with respect to the variation pattern of the reach effect G development notification effect and the super reach θ in which the reach effect G is executed after the effect result is notified as the effect C or the reach effect D, the super reach κ While the difference between the ratio at which the reach effect C is executed and the ratio at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern is 60%, the reach effect is produced by the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to guess whether or not it is, it becomes possible to pay attention to which of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
The rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or substantially the same (for example, modified example 029SG-). As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the portion in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are the same).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is expected that the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed. Because you will be able to do it, you can improve your game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect.
The expectation when the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same as or substantially the same as the expectation when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree and the execution of the reach effect D when the execution of the reach effect C is determined are determined. The part where the jackpot expectation is the same),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is similarly in an advantageous state. You will be able to expect more, so you can improve your game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects.
A first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) suggesting that the effect result of the first suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion. Execution of advantageous result suggestion effect that can execute the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31).
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect In the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the meter effect is determined, and in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
The ratio at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is the ratio of the development suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The rate at which the effect is executed is different (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion effect at a different rate than in the case of effect D),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect is different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that it is suggested that the development suggestion effect is executed. Since it can be performed suitably, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) suggesting that the effect result of the first suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion. Execution of advantageous result suggestion effect that can execute the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31).
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and FIG. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
When the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect is the first in the first development pattern. 2 When the suggestion effect is executed, the ratio is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13). Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. , The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the execution of the reach effect D is decided).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution ratios of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the effect result is advantageous, are different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suggest the production result, and thus it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestion effect is the specific development effect or the special development effect after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect. Is higher than the relation about the effect result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, in FIG. 11-28 (A)). As shown, the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ depending on the variable display result. Whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern are whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and then develops into one of the reach effect G to the reach effect I, and these reach effect G to the reach effect. The part that is determined according to which of I it develops),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development effect and the second special development effect is the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect close to the execution time of the first special development effect or the second special development effect. Since it is largely related to this, the attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect can be increased by executing the first special development effect and the second special development effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to the ninth aspects.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs between before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, modified example 029SG-12). As described above, the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is performed in any of the reach effects A to the reach effect F).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect can be suitably executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to which of the first development pattern and the second development pattern.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to tenth aspects.
As the notification mode of the production results in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7) in which it is simply notified that the advantageous state is not controlled is super reach. In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the portion where the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D and the variable display ends) and the above-mentioned after being notified once that the advantageous state is not controlled. A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, after notifying once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D shown in the modified example 029SG-7, is again performed. It has a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit.
When the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed is the first. When the effect result of 1 suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode, the ratio is the same as the ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example). As shown in the modified example 029SG-7, the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode. And, when the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode, the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z is the same).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are notified in the second notification mode, so that the player can be given an unexpected feeling, and the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect can be produced. The first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect depends on the case where the result is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode. Since the processing for determining the execution of the above can be standardized, the amount of data required for the processing can be suppressed.

The gaming machine according to the 12th aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 7th to 11th aspects.
As the notification mode of the production results in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7) in which it is simply notified that the advantageous state is not controlled is super reach. In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the portion where the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D and the variable display ends) and the above-mentioned after being notified once that the advantageous state is not controlled. A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, after notifying once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D shown in the modified example 029SG-7, is again performed. It has a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit.
When the special development effect is executed after the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is described. The ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is determined by the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. When notified in the second notification mode, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-8, the reach effect C or After the reach effect D is executed and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed, and the reach effect G is executed. When it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ big hit (PB1-7)), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ big hit. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in is the chance-up effect executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The part that differs from the ratio),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the first advantageous result suggestion depends on whether or not the special development effect is executed before it is notified that the advantageous state is controlled. Since the ratio at which the production or the second advantageous result suggestion production is executed can be different, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to the twelfth aspects.
The advantageous result suggestion effect executing means includes a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). Is feasible and
The execution ratio of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the branch destination suggestion effects are pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z. The part where the execution rate of the high expectation reach production development notification production differs depending on which one is executed),
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect having the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed. If this is the case, it will be an effect result for notifying that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-9). When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, or when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, the reach effect I When is executed, it is notified that the variable display result will be a big hit),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised, and the player pays attention to whether or not the special development effect is executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect is executed. Because it can be made to, the game entertainment can be improved.

FIG. 11-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 029SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change) as a winning determination result. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in the feature unit 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 is one of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, for example. Numerical data indicating the unit may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-3 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 029SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 029SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 029SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this feature unit 029SG) (about 1 in this feature unit 029SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 029SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4 (B). In the feature unit 029SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 029SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG. In this feature unit 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 029SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in this feature unit 029SG, as super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ. ), The variable pattern (PA2-4) that is different from the variable display result of the super reach δ, and the variable display result that is different from the variable display result of the super reach ε. Fluctuation pattern (PA2-6), fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach η. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The deviation pattern (PA2-9), the fluctuation pattern (PA2-10) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-8) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-11) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-10) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ. ) Is provided with a variation pattern (PA2-12) that is different from the above.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 029SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 029SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. With some exceptions, the longer the special map fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to be longer than that of the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The special map fluctuation time is set longer than the special map fluctuation time, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ε fluctuation pattern is set. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ε fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern, and the special figure of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Of these super reach α fluctuation patterns to super reach κ fluctuation patterns, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern are not provided with fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a big hit. In other words, regarding these super reach α fluctuation patterns to super reach κ fluctuation patterns, the super reach α fluctuation pattern has the shortest special figure fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern excluding the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation is set low, and the jackpot expectation is set to increase as the special figure fluctuation time becomes longer.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, a super reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a super reach fluctuation pattern having a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach κ fluctuation pattern. The super reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set so that the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) has a length of execution period as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. Is a variation pattern in which the reach effect A of L1 is executed and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect A. As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the super reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the reach effect B of (L2> L1) is executed and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the super reach α fluctuation pattern and the super reach β fluctuation pattern are from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of the variable display result). It is also a variation pattern in which a meter effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect can be executed over the timing). As described above, since the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A, the meter effect executable period in the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set. The length L5 is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect executable period in the super reach α fluctuation pattern (L5> L4).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (C), the super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is an effect pattern for notifying the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The execution period of both the reach effect C and the reach effect D is set to the length L3. Further, in the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, the reach effect H is further executed after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Which of the reach effect H development notification effect to notify and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to notify that either the reach effect F or the reach effect I is executed (which notification is executed). It is also a variation pattern that can execute the branch destination suggestion effect that suggests (whether to branch to the effect).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (D), the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) has a reach effect B having an execution period of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. Is executed to notify that the variable display result is out of order, and then the reach effect E development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the reach effect E can be executed (reach effect E development suggestion effect feasible period length: L6a). This is a fluctuation pattern that does not eventually develop into the reach effect E and notifies the loss. As with the super reach β fluctuation pattern, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation in which the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect (length of the meter effect executable period: L5). It is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D (either reach) as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display. It is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the reach effect G after notifying that the variable display result is out of order by executing L3) for the length of the effect execution period, and finally the reach. It is a fluctuation pattern that notifies the deviation without developing into the production G. Further, the super reach ε fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. It is possible to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect after executing the reach effect B of the above to notify that the variable display result is out of order, and further notify that the reach effect E develops into the reach effect E development notification effect ( Reach effect E This is a variation pattern in which the reach effect E is executed after the length of the execution period of the development notification effect: L6b) is executed. The super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (the length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter effect enablement period is set to be longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect enablement period. The length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. Further, in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η fluctuation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes the reach effect A as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display. A high-expectation reach effect that informs the development of a reach effect (reach effect F or reach effect I, which will be described later in the case of this feature unit) with a high expectation of a big hit instead of the reach effect A from the middle of the reach effect A. It is a variation pattern in which the development notification effect is executed over L7 (L7> L6b), which is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect F is further executed. As for the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach effect A switches to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (the reach effect A has a high expectation reach in the middle). Since the effect is switched to the effect development notification effect, the length of the meter effect enablement period is also a fluctuation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. Further, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F (notification timing of the variable display result) is the reach effect in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E is set to L12 (L12> L11), which is longer than L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ fluctuation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. (The length of the execution period of any of the reach effects is also L3), and after notifying that the variable display result is out of order in the reach effects C or the reach effects D, the reach effect G development suggestion effect can be executed. Further, the reach effect G development notification effect for notifying the development of the reach effect G is executed over L8 (L7> L8), which is shorter than the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect. Further, it is a fluctuation pattern that executes the reach effect G. Further, the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is executed, and the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect H development notification is notified that the reach effect H is further developed. It is a fluctuation pattern that executes the effect and executes the reach effect H. Further, the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ fluctuation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is executed, and the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the length of the execution period is L7. This is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed. Further, the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Further, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is highly expected in the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F is set to L13 (L13> L12> L11) longer than L12.

The super reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) has a high expectation reach effect development in which the length of the execution period is L7 from the timing before the reach in the fluctuation pattern of other super reach during the variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed. In addition, the super reach λ fluctuation pattern can execute the meter effect from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (high expectation reach effect development notification from the timing before the reach). Since the effect is executed, the length of the meter effect executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'': L4> L4'> L4''), which is shorter than L4'. Further, in the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is L13 (L13), which is the same as the super reach κ. > L12> L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), as a high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the feature unit 029SG, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened. A blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, a pre-stage effect that displays a front line on the image display device 5 after the blackout effect, and a switching effect after the pre-stage effect. After the switching effect, the image display device 5 displays the rear-stage effect, and after the post-stage effect, the movable body 32 is placed on the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5 from the origin position above the image display device 5. A movable body effect that drops (moves) to an effect position that overlaps with a substantially central position is executed.

In the first stage effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-55, the dialogue content spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007. At the same time, it is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the latter stage effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-55, following the first stage effect, the dialogue content spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the dialogue of the first stage production is "I'm not alone ... I'll show everyone's power!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Miracle Attack!".

More specifically, the first stage production is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the lines of "not one person ..." are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and at the same time. In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters of "not one person ..." are displayed. Then, in the second period, the dialogue "I will show everyone's power!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and at the same time, the "I will show everyone's power!" 12 in the display area of the image display device 5. The characters are displayed below the characters "I'm not alone ...". Further, the subsequent effect is also composed of a first period and a second period. In the first period, the lines of "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and in the display area of the image display device 5. The four characters of the "miracle" are displayed. Then, in the second period, the lines of "Attack!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five characters of "Attack!" Are below the characters of "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

That is, in the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the feature unit 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the first stage effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the second stage effect, and the first stage effect is the first. The number of characters displayed in the two periods is larger than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the subsequent production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the display mode of the lines in the front stage effect is different from the display mode of the lines in the rear stage effect, and in particular, the lines in the rear stage effect are the display of the lines in the front stage effect. It is displayed in a display mode in which the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and the character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 composed of a plurality of characters (for example, "not one person ...") is gradually displayed in the first period. The character image 029SG007, which is displayed in a large and bright manner (fade-in) and then consists of a plurality of characters (for example, "I will show everyone's power!"), Is gradually enlarged and bright in the second period. It is displayed in an aspect (fade-in). In addition, the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone ... I'll show you the power of everyone!") Is displayed in the largest and brightest form, and then gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade out). And eventually disappear. The character image 029SG007 may be moved while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", "le"). ) Is displayed (frame-in) so as to move while rotating from the right side of the display screen toward the center in order in the first period (frame-in), and a plurality of character images 029SG008 (for example, one character) are displayed. "A", "Ta", "Tsu", "Ku", "!") Are displayed (frame-in) so that they move while rotating from the bottom to the center of the display screen in the second period (dynamic display). Will be done. Further, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") Are the largest and are displayed brightly, they move so as to spread radially toward the surroundings and finally disappear from the display screen. It is displayed in the mode (frame out).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 of the previous stage effect is small, planar (two-dimensional), has a slow movement (change speed of the display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. .. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 of the latter stage effect is larger and three-dimensional (three-dimensional) than the character image 029SG007 of the first stage effect, and the movement (change speed (movement speed) of the display mode by frame-in) is fast and has high brightness. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-55).

If the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the second stage effect is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect, the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in is performed. The size and brightness of a part of the above may be reversed. Further, although the dialogue content is different between the first stage effect and the second stage effect, at least a part of the content may be common.

In this way, the larger the size of the character image that composes the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis, the more three-dimensional the form is, the higher the emphasis is, and the faster the movement is, the higher the emphasis is. It can be said that the higher the brightness is, the higher the emphasis is. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image are illustrated in a form in which the latter stage effect has a higher degree of emphasis than the first stage effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage effect is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image of is higher than that of the character image of the previous stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes those in which the thickness of the characters is higher in the thicker than in the thinner ones, and in the color, the ones with higher saturation and lightness are higher. May be good. Further, not only the display mode of the character image itself but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to increase the degree of emphasis.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG. In this feature unit 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (Variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (Variation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (Variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (Variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1 It is determined from -9 (variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot) and PB1-10 (variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot).

When determining the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, set the determination ratio of PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest, and set PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern). , PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (variation of super reach η jackpot) Pattern), PB1-7 (Variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (Variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1-9 (Variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot), PB1-10 (Variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot) The determination ratio may be increased in the order of (variation pattern of) (determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected: PB1-2 <PB1-3 <PB1-4 <PB1-5 < PB1-6 <PB1-7 <PB1-8 <PB1-9 <PB1-10).

In the present feature unit 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and at least two or more jackpot fluctuation pattern determination ratios are different. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and variation patterns may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables according to the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach α loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach β loss), PA2 -4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ outlier), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ outlier), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε outlier), PA2-7 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ζ outlier) , PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of outlier of super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of outlier of super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation of out of super reach κ) Pattern) and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ outlier).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 029SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

When the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination tables A to D, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1 for the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table B) If it is PA1-2, if it is the deviation pattern determination table C, it is PA1-3, if it is the deviation pattern determination table D, it is PA1-4), and PA2-1 (normal reach is lost). (Variation pattern of Super Reach α), PA2-2 (Variation pattern of Super Reach α), PA2-3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ), PA2-5 (Super Reach) δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 ( Super reach θ out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (super reach κ out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-12 (super reach λ out-of-order fluctuation pattern) determined in this order The ratio may be set to be low (determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when the outlier variation pattern determination table is selected: PA2-12 <PA2-11 <PA2-10 <PA2-9 <PA2-8 <PA2-7. <PA2-6 <PA2-5 <PA2-4 <PA2-3 <PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest for the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the super reach β fluctuation is set. The jackpot expectation of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach η fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is the jackpot expectation of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach λ fluctuation pattern is the super reach κ fluctuation pattern. It is set higher than the jackpot expectation of. As for the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern, as described above, since only the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is out of alignment is provided, the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in the feature unit 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Further, a first reserved storage display area 029SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 029SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 029SG005D and the second hold storage display area 029SG005U, the hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. .. In this feature unit 029SG, these hold displays can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display depending on which display mode the hold storage display is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as a hold display advance notice effect) that makes the ratio controlled by the game state (big hit expectation degree) different.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 029SG, a meter 029SG005M that can change the display mode in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included) is displayed as the meter effect described above. ..

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 029SG is a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-12, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 029SG151A, a second special drawing holding storage unit 029SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 029SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 029SG153, a game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, a game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 029SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 029SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 029SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 029SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 029SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 029SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 029SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 has a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 029SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 029SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 029SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A of the feature unit 029SG, the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 11-20) is undecided. Whether or not, that is, when a new start prize is generated, a flag value is set according to the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag and the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D and the second hold storage display area 029SG5U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (blue circle) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, blue circle or red circle) different from the normal display mode. ) Or "2" (red circle) is set, the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 029SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 029SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 029SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS102; N). Step 029SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS105; N). Step 029SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS103 and step 029SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 029SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 029SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process of step 029SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 029SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-16) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-17) described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination processing of step 029SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this judgment result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the big hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets each judgment as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display. In that case, the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "missing", is executed (step 029SGS128), and whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, , It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 029SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

Further, when it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and in the case of a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 029SGS133), selects and sets the jackpot variation pattern determination table (step 029SGS135), and steps. Proceed to 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are used. A variation category according to a range of determination values including the random value MR3 is determined (step 029SGS138). In this feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 029SGS138 to the effect control board 12 is made (step 029SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 029SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 029SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Step 029 Following the processing of SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted higher one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 029SGS144), the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 029SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Just do it. As described above, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 029SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted higher one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 029SGS148), the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 11-3 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 029SGS150a). In this step 029SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , Step 029 In the process of SGS150a, the special figure display result using different determination data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 029SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 029SGS155, or when it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 029SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 029SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 029SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination in step 029SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in the state or the time reduction state (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 029SGS168; Y). Step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, the storage of the reserved storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. By reading the value or the like, the reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 029SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 029SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be obtained by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variation pattern is determined in the process of step 029SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative pattern to the reach state when the variable display result is “missing”.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 029SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 029SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is played from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to end the variation. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 029SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 029SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 029SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 029SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 029SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 029SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 029SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time reduction flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time reduction counter is set to "0". After setting (step 029SGS209), the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing step 029SGS211 and step 029SGS212, the time reduction flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time reduction counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 029SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 029SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. Is determined by whether or not there is an entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N). Y) Further, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243). When the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), a jackpot not shown is shown based on the variable display result being a jackpot. By referring to the look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A). Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in a blue circle in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D or the second hold storage display area 029SG5U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in a red circle in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D or the second hold storage display area 029SG5U. To.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), for example, the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect may be determined at a rate of 65%.

Further, in step 029SGS243, when the symbol designation command of the entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is the symbol designation command indicating the loss (step 029SGS243; Y). The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 029SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 029SGS247. It's different.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), for example, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "non-reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. , The execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "Other", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is performed at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "super reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is performed at a rate of 25%. The execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided by such a setting, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided, so that it is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Further, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit when the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the display pattern β than when it is executed by the display pattern α. , It is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the hold memory display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice effect, is displayed.

In the feature unit 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the presence or absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern are determined at the same ratio regardless of the big hit type, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is a big hit, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be different depending on the big hit type. By doing so, the player can be controlled to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed and which display pattern the hold memory display is displayed. It will be possible to draw attention.

After the execution of step 029SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined in step 029SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 029SGS249).

After the execution of step 029SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display as a blue circle, "1" is set in the hold display flag of the entry. If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display with a red circle, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252. ..

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 029SGS249 (step 029SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white circle (step 029SGS250). ), Proceed to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. To.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are stored for each buffer number. Shift to a higher position (step 029SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, it is used as a stop symbol. , A plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). If the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach misses (missing symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a meter effect determination process for determining whether or not the meter effect is executed and an effect pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. Judgment (step 029SGS278). Whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern may be determined by whether or not the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern.

If the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283, and if the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y). Further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS280; N), the variable is further changed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS281), and when the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS 281; N), The process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the reach effect E development notification effect determination process.

In the process of step 029SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, when the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS 280; Y), branching is performed. The branch destination suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of execution of the prior suggestion effect and the effect pattern is executed (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variable display variation pattern is any of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and the variable display variation pattern is super reach ε or In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed is executed (step 029SGS286). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach effect of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from the reach effect C and the reach effect D (step 029SGS287) according to the variable display result and the variable pattern, and the determination is made. A process table corresponding to the reach effect and the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the process of step 029SGS287, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PB1-4), the reach effect C The execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι (PB1-8), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of the reach effect C is 90. It is determined at a rate of%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed according to the fluctuation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. By determining at different ratios, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), the reach effect D is set higher than the reach effect C as the overall jackpot expectation.

Further, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach ι (the variable pattern in which the reach effect H development notification effect and the reach effect H are executed after the execution of the advance effect and the precursor effect). As for, the execution of the reach effect D is always decided. On the other hand, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ (the fluctuation pattern in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the execution of the pre-effect and the precursor effect), the reach is executed. There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the reach effect D is executed.

That is, in the feature unit 029SG, regarding the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ) in which the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed during the variable display, the present feature is performed after the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed. The rate at which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed in Part 029 (the rate at which the reach effect I with the highest big hit expectation is executed) is higher when the execution of the reach effect C is decided. Is set higher than when it is decided to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 029SG, even if the reach effect C having a lower jackpot expectation than the reach effect D is executed during the variable display, the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed after the reach effect C. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach effect C is performed, the player recognizes that the jackpot expectation is low when the reach effect C is executed, and the game interest is reduced during the execution of the reach effect C. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and these from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), a comparison is made between the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-effect, the precursor effect, and the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect are executed instead of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference of the super reach κ is 40%. The difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the variation pattern is set to 60%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (E), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40. The difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ is set to 20%.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ depend on whether the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. Whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which the advance effect, the precursor effect, and the high expectation reach effect notification effect are executed from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, or as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Since it is possible to infer whether the reach effect G is a variable display of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified, the reach effect C and the reach effect D can be inferred. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which one is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a chance-up effect is executed, which suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) has increased during the variable display. Chance to determine the effect pattern of the up effect The up effect determination process is executed (step 029SGS289).

The effect control CPU 120 that has executed the chance-up effect determination process then starts a process timer according to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 213SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 029SGS292). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left middle right decorative pattern to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the process timer has timed out. do. Then, if the process timer is not timer-out, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer is timer-out, the process data is switched and the next process is performed. The process timer may be started and the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 029SG is executed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination process. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first has any of the variable display fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS301). When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated. When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step). 029SGS301; N) determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β. , Super reach δ, Super reach ζ, Super reach η, Super reach λ (step 029SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not meter effect is executed according to the variation pattern. The effect pattern is determined (step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach non-reach) fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%. The execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , The execution of the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%. do. When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of normal reach, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, and the meter effect pattern B is determined. The execution in the meter effect is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution in the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. The execution in E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

If the fluctuation pattern is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the meter effect pattern A is determined. The execution in the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, the execution in the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. The execution in D is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in the pattern E of the above is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution in the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in the pattern E of the above is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-24 (B) and 11-25, the pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (from the start of the variable display if it is a non-reach variable pattern without shortening). The meter 029SG005M is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step at the first timing during the variable display result notification (the period until the variable display result is notified), and the pattern B is the first timing and the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach variation without shortening). If it is a pattern, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (a total of two steps increases) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the variable display result. , Pattern C is the first and second timings, and the first in the period from the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach (in the case of a normal reach variation pattern, the period from the reach to the notification of the variable display result). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (a total of three steps increase).

Further, in the pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing during the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B (a total increase of four steps). ) It is a production pattern. Further, in the pattern E, the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (high expectation reach production start / stop) after the reach production A is being executed and the fourth timing is executed. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (increases by a total of five steps) at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect. The pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by 5 steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the meter effect is determined after executing the process of the 029SGS303 (step 029SGS304). When the execution of the meter effect is not decided (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the meter effect is decided (step 029SGS304; Y), the determined meter effect effect pattern is stored. (Step 029SGS305), the meter effect start waiting timer according to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS306).

When the execution of the meter effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter effect start wait timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the value of the meter effect start wait timer is the timer. Determine if it is out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the meter effect has timed out, the process table for the meter effect is selected according to the determined effect pattern of the meter effect, and the process timer for the meter effect is started. After that, the value of the meter effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the meter effect process timer has timed out. If the meter effect process timer is not timer-out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter effect process timer, and if the meter effect process timer is timer-out, the process data. To switch and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to execute the meter effect during the variable display.

As described above, in the feature unit 029SG, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases up to 5 stages by executing the meter effect during the variable display, and the high expectation reach by increasing the meter 029SG005M up to 5 stages. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the production development production is executed.

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. In the effect control E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). .. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach δ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Reach production E The execution of the development suggestion production is decided at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is 80%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process of step 029SGS311 determines whether or not the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined (step 029SGS312). When the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS312; N), the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process is completed, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS312). Y) sets the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect E development suggestion effect and ends the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS313).

When the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach effect E development suggestion effect start waiting timer each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and reaches. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for suggesting the development of the effect E has expired. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect E development suggestion effect has timed out, the process table for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is selected and the process timer for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is started. After that, the value of the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer has timed out. .. If the process timer for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer, and the reach effect E development suggestion effect is performed. When the process timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed is rather than the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach δ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed. Since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ, the reach effect E development is performed after the reach effect B is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , The execution in the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. Determined at a rate of 0%. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 0%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 15%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 5%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 10%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 10%. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach κ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is the execution of the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D in the image display device 5. It is an effect pattern that displays the branch destination suggestion image X that suggests both execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, and the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is the reach effect C or the reach effect D in the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying the branch destination suggestion image Y suggesting the execution of the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the above, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is the reach effect C or the reach effect on the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying a branch destination suggestion image Z suggesting execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect during the execution period of D.

In the feature unit 029SG, among the patterns X to Z, the pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher ratio than the pattern X and the pattern Y when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. That is, the pattern Z is a production pattern having a higher expectation of execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect than the pattern X and the pattern Y (high expectation level of execution expectation of the reach effect development notification effect: pattern Z> pattern Y). , Pattern Z> Pattern X). Further, the pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than the pattern X and the pattern X when the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, that is, the pattern Y has a reach effect H higher than the pattern X and the pattern Z. This is an effect pattern having a high degree of expectation for execution of the development notification effect (reach effect H, degree of expectation for execution of the development notification effect: pattern Y> pattern Z, pattern Y> pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and are determined according to the variable display result. The proportions are not different. That is, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern develop into one of reach effect G to reach effect I after the reach effect C and reach effect D are executed, and whether or not these reach effect G to reach are performed. Although it is determined according to which of the effects I develops, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination ratio may be different depending on both the variation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may be different depending only on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined by the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). When the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS232; Y), the determined branch is executed. The effect pattern of the preceding suggestion effect is stored (step 029SGS323), the branch destination suggestion effect start waiting timer is set, and the branch destination suggestion effect determination process ends (step 029SGS324).

When the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer every time the variable display effect process is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestion effect. Determines whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion effect times out, the process table for the branch destination suggestion effect is selected according to the determined effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect, and the process timer for the branch destination suggestion effect is started. Let me. After that, the value of the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion effect process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion effect process timer, and the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is timed out. If so, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the branch destination suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in the feature unit 029SG, any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It is possible to draw the player's attention to switching to the pre-production without being notified of the variable display result as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Further, the advance effect is performed according to which of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Since the ratio of the reach effect H development notification effect being executed after the precursor effect and the ratio of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect being executed are different, the branch destination suggestion image X and the branch destination are displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the suggestion image Y and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed, and the game interest can be improved.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ε, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is 50%. The execution of the reach production G development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is 80%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process of step 029SGS331 determines whether or not the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined (step 029SGS332). When the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS332; N), the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process is completed and the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS332). Y) sets the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect, and ends the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS333).

When the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect start waiting timer every time the effect process during variable display is executed, and reaches. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for suggesting the production G exhibition has expired. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect has timed out, the process table for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is selected and the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is started. After that, the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer has timed out. .. If the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is not timered out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer, and the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is performed. When the process timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect G exhibition notification effect is not executed. Since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed at a rate, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ fluctuation patterns, the reach effect G develops after the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern, the chance-up effect determination process is terminated. Further, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ (step 029SGS341).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach λ (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach λ (step). 029SGS341; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS 342).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS342; N), the variable is further changed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343). When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect A according to the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of the effects in the reach effect A to the reach effect I in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-32 (A) to 11-32 (E). As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) to 11-32 (I), each of the reach effect A to the reach effect I includes a reach title display period for displaying the title of each reach effect on the image display device 5. After that, the image display device 5 is composed of a battle effect execution period for displaying the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character.

During the reach title display period of each of the reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as a part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 11-33 (A)).

Further, regarding the battle effect execution period of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the movable body movable period in which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle effect execution period and the cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5. There is a cut-in image displayable period, and as part of the chance-up effect, the movement of the movable body 32 during the movable body movable period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period can be executed. (See FIG. 11-33 (A)).

Regarding the battle effect execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, a branch destination suggestion effect executeable period is provided after the movable body movable period and the cut-in image displayable period.

Further, regarding the battle execution period of the reach effect E and the reach effect F, a movable body movable period is provided in the first half of the battle effect execution period, and the latter half of the battle effect execution period (end of the battle effect). In the vicinity of the timing), an operation of urging the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result according to the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in the image display device 5. Operation to display the promotion image A promotion image display period is provided. The operation promotion image display period is usually a period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature unit 029SG, during the battle execution period between the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the movement of the movable body during the movable body movable period and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation promotion image display period as part of the chance-up effect. Can be executed (see FIG. 11-33 (B)).

The reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I are not provided with a movable body movable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period. That is, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I are reach effects in which the chance-up effect is not executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 of FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the variable display result is out of order, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 60%. Determined, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern R is 0. Determined at a rate of%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect A execution is determined (step 029SGS345). If it is not decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect A (step 029SGS345; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS347, and if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect A (step 029SGS345; Y). Stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach η (step 029SGS347). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach η (step). 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is being executed and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern S is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern T is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern U is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in T is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F execution is determined (step 029SGS349). When the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is not decided (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination process is finished and the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is decided. (Step 029SGS349; Y) stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect F according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect determination process (step 029SGS350).

Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ in step 029SGS343 (step 029SGS343; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a reach effect according to the variable display result. B Whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution and the effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern P is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Q of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect B execution is determined (step 029SGS352). If it is not decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS354, and if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y). Stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect B according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ. In a certain case (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E execution and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (D), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 60%, and the chance-up effect pattern S is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern T is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern U is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in T is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is being executed is determined (step 029SGS356). When the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is not decided (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination process is finished and the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is decided. (Step 029SGS356; Y) stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect E according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect determination process (step 029SGS357).

Further, in the process of step 029SGS342, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS342; Y), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach ε (step 029SGS358).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is changed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach ε (step 029SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is being executed and the chance up effect is executed according to the variable display result. The effect pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the reach effect to be executed is the reach effect C, if the variable display result is out of order, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is 60%. The execution in the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern R is determined in. Determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), when the reach effect to be executed is the reach effect D, if the variable display result is out of order, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Q of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is 10%. Determined by the ratio of. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D is determined (step 029SGS360). If the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D has not been decided (step 029SGS360; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated and the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D is being executed. When it is decided to execute (step 029SGS360; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, and the chance up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D is set according to the fluctuation pattern to determine the chance up effect. Is finished (step 029SGS361).

When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and the chance-up effect start waiting timer is set. Determine if the value has timered out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up effect has timed out, the process table for the chance-up effect is selected and the process timer for the chance-up effect is started. After that, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer is not timer-out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer is timer-out. , Switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so whether the chance-up effect is executed or not. Whether or not it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, in reach productions with relatively low expectation of big hits such as reach production A to reach production D, chance-up production is executed up to three times, so that chance-up production is performed during execution of reach production A to reach production D. It is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display result becomes a big hit effectively according to the number of times of execution.

On the other hand, in reach productions with high expectation of big hits such as reach production G to reach production I, the chance-up production that can be executed during the reach production is only once, so the chance-up production is performed multiple times. It is prevented that the performance of the reach production, which has a high expectation of a big hit, is lowered by the execution.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (E), among the effect patterns of the chance-up effect in the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the pattern P executes the red display of the reach title, but is the operation of the movable body 32. The cut-in image display is an effect pattern that is not executed, the pattern Q is an effect pattern that executes the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 but does not display the cut-in image, and the pattern R is the effect pattern of the reach title. It is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (F), among the effect patterns of the reach effect E and the chance-up effect in the reach effect F, the pattern S executes the red display of the reach title, but the movement of the movable body 32. The display of the image of the stick controller 31A is an effect pattern that is not executed, the pattern Q is an effect pattern that executes the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32, but does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, and the pattern R is an effect pattern. , The red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A are all the effect patterns.

As described above, as the chance-up effect of the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) to 11-34 (D), the chance-up effect as a whole in the reach effect A to the reach effect D is a chance increase. The jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the effect is non-execution, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is non-execution. There is. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set higher than in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern P. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern R, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than that in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern Q (the big hit of the chance-up effect in the reach effect A to the reach effect D). Expectation: Pattern R> Pattern Q> Pattern P> Non-execution).

Further, as for the chance-up effect as a whole in the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance-up effect is not executed, and when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set higher than in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern T (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F). Expectation: Pattern U> Pattern T> Pattern S> Non-execution).

Here, comparing the case where the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the case where the reach effect E or the reach effect F is executed, the pattern P and the pattern Q are common in the reach effect A to the reach effect D. While it is set as an effect pattern that can be executed in, the pattern R can be executed only when the reach effect B or the reach effect D is executed. That is, while the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be executed in any of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed only in the reach effect B and the reach effect D. It is a production that can be performed.

Further, comparing the case where the reach effect E is executed and the case where the reach effect F is executed, in the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the pattern S and the pattern T are set as an effect pattern that can be executed in common. On the other hand, the pattern U can be executed only when the reach effect F is executed. That is, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed by either the reach effect E or the reach effect F, while the display of the stick controller 31A image as the operation promotion image is the reach effect F. It is a production that can only be performed in.

Next, the effect mode of the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, a case where the reach effect A is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. The meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as a state in which the number has not increased by one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (when the execution in the pattern D or the pattern E is determined in the feature unit 029SG). (Disclosure), the meter 029SG005M is incremented by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when the reach effect A is started, first, the title image of the reach effect A and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect A are expected on the image display device 5. An expected degree image 029SG251 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG161A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect A, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG161B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (G), the battle effect by the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As shown in FIG. 11-36 (H), the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step at the fourth timing even during the battle production.

Further, during the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32. The operation toward the production position is executed. The operation of the movable body 32 as a chance-up effect is a movement from the origin position to the effect position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the effect position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K). Is displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of the super reach α, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect A) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A wins over the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect A) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image displayable period. The meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step (increased to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 stages (full tank) and that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (R), the battle effect is interrupted in the middle, and instead of the battle effect, the high-expectation reach effect development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high-expectation reach effect development notification image. The display of 029SG180 is executed. Then, the reach effect F is started. The details of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect will be described later in FIGS. 11-55.

As shown in FIGS. 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when the reach effect F is started, first, the title image of the reach effect F and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect A are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG256 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG166A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F, while any one of the pattern S, the pattern T, and the pattern U is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG166B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect F is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (U), the battle effect by the ally character B and the enemy character B is started. During the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern T or the pattern U, it is movable as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (V) and 11-36 (W). The operation (movement) from the origin position of the body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), the player is referred to the player in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not determined by the effect pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, while the effect pattern of the pattern U is used to produce the chance-up effect. When the execution is decided, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the battle effect is produced. The variable display result is notified as the effect result.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) out of the super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (a) and 11-39 (b), the battle As a result of the production, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character B to the enemy character B, and after the battle effect (reach effect F) is completed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off. To.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach η jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (c) and 11-39 (d), the battle effect is displayed. As a result of the effect, when the ally character B wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect F) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Next, a case where the reach effect B is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. The meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as a state in which the number has not increased by one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (A) to 11-40 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (when the execution in the pattern D or the pattern E is determined in the feature unit 029SG). (Disclosure), the meter 029SG005M is incremented by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (E) and 11-40 (F), when the reach effect B is started, first, the title image of the reach effect B and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect B are expected on the image display device 5. An expected degree image 029SG252 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG162A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect B, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG162B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect B is completed, the battle effect by the ally character B and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-41 (H), the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step at the fourth timing even during the battle production.

Further, during the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32. The operation (movement) to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K). Is displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character B wins the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (P) and 11-42 (Q), after the end of the cut-in image displayable period When the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the swing display is performed in a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern. At this time, when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (R), as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (S), the decorative symbol swings after the reach effect E development suggestion effect enableable period. It stops and is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (T), after the reach effect E development suggestion effect enableable period, the reach effect E development notification As the effect, the reach effect E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, the reach production E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach effect E is started, first, the title image of the reach effect E and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect E are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG255 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG165A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect E, while any one of the pattern S, the pattern T, and the pattern U is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG165B whose title character is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect E is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W), the battle effect by the ally character A and the enemy character B is started. During the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern T or the pattern U, it is movable as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (X) and 11-43 (Y). The operation (movement) from the origin position of the body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (Z), 11-43 (a), and 11-43 (b), the player is referred to the player in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not determined by the effect pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, while the effect pattern of the pattern U is used to produce the chance-up effect. When the execution is decided, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the battle effect is produced. The variable display result is notified as the effect result.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) out of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (c) and 11-44 (d), the battle As a result of the effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character A to the enemy character B, and after the battle effect (reach effect E) is completed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the omission. To.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach ζ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e) and 11-44 (f), the battle effect is exhibited. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect E) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Here, the production mode of the reach effect E development suggestion effect from FIGS. 11-42 (Q) to 11-42 (T) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45 (A) to 11-45 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the decorative patterns are oscillated in a combination indicating the detachment. In this state, as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the first stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player such as lower brightness and less display color than other images displayed in the display area such as a decorative pattern. It may be an image.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is completed, the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is once shown in FIGS. 11-45 (C) to 11-45 (D). After finishing the display of, the second stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second-stage reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first-stage reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170. Any image may be used as long as it is more visible to the player than the image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (E), the reach effect E development notification image in the image display device 5 is used as the reach effect E development notification effect. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (F), the reach effect E development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect E development notification effect. Image 029SG181 is displayed and reach effect E is executed.

Next, a case where the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. When the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed as the reach effect of the super reach, the meter effect is not executed, so that the description of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach is omitted.

When the reach effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A) to 11-46 (C), when the reach effect C is started, the reach effect C is first displayed on the image display device 5. The title image of the above and the expectation degree image 029SG253 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect C are displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG163A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect C, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG163B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect C is completed, the battle effect by the ally character C and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (C).

On the other hand, when the reach effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D) to 11-46 (F), when the reach effect D is started, the image display device 5 first performs the same. The title image of the reach effect D and the expectation degree image 029SG254 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect D are displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG164A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect D, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG164B whose title character is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect D is completed, the battle effect by the ally character D and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (F).

Further, during the battle production of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, FIGS. 11-47 (G) and 11- As shown in 47 (H), the operation (movement) from the origin position of the movable body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (I) and 11-47 (J). Is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (K) to 11-47- (M), when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the cut during the battle effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. After the in-image displayable period, the reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) is executed on the image display device 5 as the branch destination suggestion effect, and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is executed. Branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X), branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image Y) suggesting that the development notification effect (reach effect H) is executed. 029SG005Y), or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is executed is displayed.

After the branch destination suggestion effect executable period, if the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, FIGS. 11-48 (N) to 11-48 (P). ), When the reach effect C is executed, it is notified that the variable display is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character C by the enemy character A as a result of the effect of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed. If so, it is notified that the variable display is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character D by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot, the reach effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S). When C is executed, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit when the ally character C wins the enemy character A as the effect result of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed, the effect result of the battle effect. As a result, when the ally character D defeats the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment.

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach ε or super reach θ, the end of the branch destination suggestion effect execution period is as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (T) to 11-49 (V). Later, when the ally character C or the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the swing display is performed in a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern. At this time, when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (W), as the reach effect G development suggestion effect, a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (X), the decorative symbol swings after the reach effect G development suggestion effect enableable period. It stops and is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach effect G development suggestion effect enablement period, the reach effect G development notification As the effect, the reach effect G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, the reach production G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (Z), when the reach effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and the expectation image 029SG257 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach effect G are first displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G is completed, the battle effect by the ally character C and the enemy character B is started as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (a) and 11-50 (b). .. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-9) out of the super reach θ, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (c) and 11-50 (d), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (e) and 11-50 (f), the battle effect is exhibited. As a result of the effect, when the ally character C wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Here, the production mode of the reach effect G development suggestion effect from FIGS. 11-49 (V) to 11-49 (Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (A) to 11-54 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the decorative patterns are oscillated in a combination indicating the detachment. In this state, as the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the first stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player such as lower brightness and less display color than other images displayed in the display area such as a decorative pattern. It may be an image.

Then, after the display period of the first stage of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (C) to 11-54 (D), the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is once used. After finishing the display of, the second stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second-stage reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is higher in brightness than the first-stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, and has more display colors. Any image may be used as long as it is more visible to the player than the image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (E), the reach effect G development notification image in the image display device 5 is used as the reach effect G development notification effect. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), the reach effect G development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect G development notification effect. The image 029SG182 is displayed and the reach effect G is executed.

When the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern of super reach ι or a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, the reach effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h). The shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect after the branch destination suggestion effect executable period during the execution of C or the reach effect D (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area). The shutter image 029SG006 is moved and displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the pre-effect is completed based on the elapse of the predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 is retracted from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect. In response to the evacuation of the shutter image 029SG006, the image of the character C can be visually recognized by the player in the display area of the image display device 5.

When the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (i), the reach effect H development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect H development notification effect. After the image 029SG183 is displayed, the reach effect H is executed. Further, when the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (j), the image display device 5 has a high expectation as a high expectation reach effect development notification effect. After the reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the reach effect I is executed. The details of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect will be described later in FIGS. 11-55.

When the variable display of the variable display is the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (k), when the reach effect H is started, the image display device 5 first performs the variable display. The title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H and the expectation degree image 029SG258 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect H are displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H is completed, the battle effect by the ally character D and the enemy character C is started as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (l) and 11-52 (m). .. When the variable display variation pattern is a variation pattern (PA2-10) out of the super reach ι, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (n) and 11-52 (o), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-8) of the super reach ι jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (p) and 11-52 (q), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character D wins over the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Further, when the variable display of the variable display is the variable display of the variable display of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s), high expectation reach effect development When the reach effect I is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach effect I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays both the images of the characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I and the expectation degree image 029SG259, so that the reach effect I is the other super reach. Produces a special feeling by having a higher expectation of big hits than reach production.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (t) and 11-53 (u), a battle effect by the ally character A to the ally character D and the enemy character C is performed. Is started. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-11) out of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (v) and 11-53 (w), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character A to the ally character D are defeated by the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the display is out of order. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) of the super reach κ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the battle effect is displayed. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A to the ally character D win the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative pattern stops at the combination indicating the big hit. Is displayed.

Here, the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect from FIGS. 11-37 (R) to 11-37 (T) and 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s) will be described in more detail. ..

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, the reach effect F or the reach effect is produced in the display area of the image display device 5. The high expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 that notifies that I is executed is displayed. Further, after the high-expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. Is executed.

In the blackout effect, the darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, which makes it difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image, etc.), and the display screen itself. In addition to lowering the brightness of the image, the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lower than before the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect. Further, the amount of directing light of various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided in the game area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the gaming machine frame 3 is set to the amount of the directing light before the execution of the high expectation reach directing development notification effect. By lowering the amount, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image, etc.).

Then, after the blackout effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (C), an image of the character C is displayed as a pre-stage effect. Further, in the first stage effect, the dialogue content spoken by the character C is displayed as a character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55 (D) and 11-55 (E), the switching effect is executed after the end of the pre-stage effect, and the post-stage effect is executed after the end of the switch effect. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. The feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images is displayed as a switching effect. May be displayable. When any one of the plurality of images can be displayed as the switching effect in this way, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which image is displayed.

In the subsequent effect, as described above, the dialogue spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has a smaller number of characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed at the time of the previous stage production, while the size per character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see FIG. 11-10). ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-55 (F), after the end of the subsequent stage effect, the movable body effect is executed. In the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is the upper position of the image display device 5, to the effect position overlapping with the substantially center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the effect position moves to the origin position by driving a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

Then, after the movable body effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (G), the reach effect according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach η, the reach effect). F. If the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect I) is executed.

Next, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-56 (A) to 11-56 (D), in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, first, when the variable display is started, at the second timing before the reach. The meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once and becomes full. Next, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, the telop image 029SG005T that informs that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 stages (is full) and that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed without becoming a reach or executing any of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. It should be noted that the production mode of the high expectation reach effect development notification production is the same as the production mode described above in FIGS. 11-55. After the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-53, the reach effect I is executed, and finally it is notified that the variable display result is off or a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is the reach effect E development notification. The length of the effect execution period is set longer than L6b, and the reach effect E is executed after the reach effect E development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect E. For the length L11 until the notification is made, the reach effect F is executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect F. The length of the period up to L12 and the period from the start of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the execution of the reach effect I until the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect I. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, when the reach effect E is executed after the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed, the period until it is notified that the variable display result becomes a big hit. However, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the excessive prolongation of the game. Further, in the case where the reach effect I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, the player is preferably focused on the reach effect I until the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, and is therefore longer than the reach effect A. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the reach production B over a period of time, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, the reach effect B is different from the reach effect A in that the development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result. Therefore, even if the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed, the player is surely paid attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect B. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when the meter effect is executed as an effect suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect during the execution of the reach effect A and the reach effect B. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed by the execution of the meter effect.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition, the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

Further, in the present feature unit 029SG, an embodiment in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C and the reach effect are not limited to this. Even when D is executed, the meter effect may be executed. Especially in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, in which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed from the middle of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. , A case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode for notifying the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect) triggered by the advance effect or the precursor effect. By doing so, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the pre-effect or precursor effect by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A. Since the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, even if the reach effect A is not executed, the player is asked to perform the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when the reach effect B is executed, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I may be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention may be provided in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the reach effect B is executed. By doing so, even when the reach effect B is executed, the player can pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed. You can improve your interest.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step from the first timing to the fifth timing as a meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M is not limited to this. A case may be provided in which the number is increased by two or more steps at any timing. Further, when the timing for increasing the meter 029SG005M by two or more stages is provided in any of the first timing to the fifth timing in this way, the meter 029SG005M is set at a timing before the reach effect A and the reach effect B are started. The rate of development to reach effect I may differ depending on whether the meter is increased to the fifth stage or the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth stage at the timing after the reach effect A or the reach effect B is started. Further, although the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the fifth stage as a meter effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect is the meter 029SG005M. The display mode may be changed in 4 steps or less or 6 steps or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the reach effect I is executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect I. The length of the period until the notification is L13 is from the start of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect until the reach effect F is executed and the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect F. Since the length of the period is set longer than L12, it is controlled to the big hit game state by lengthening the period until the effect result is notified when the reach effect I with a higher expectation of big hit is executed. It is possible to effectively raise the expectation that is given.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the feature unit 029SG is maximum from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed) is included. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-45, in the reach effect E development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect E in the feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. It is a production that will be done. That is, in the present feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 stages as the meter effect, but the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is 2 stages as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. Can only change up to. For this reason, in the meter effect, the image to be produced (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change up to the 5th stage than the reach effect E development suggestion effect, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the 5th stage as the meter effect, while the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is changed to the 2nd stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changed up to the fifth stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. In this way, when the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the fifth stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is up to the fifth stage. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect enablement period can execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect. Since the length of the period is set longer than L6a, the reach effect E has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect A after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it can be suggested for a longer period of time than the reach effect E being executed after the execution of the development notification effect is suggested, the game entertainment can be improved.

The feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period L6a, but the present invention is limited to this. The length L5 of the meter effect feasible period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect feasible period.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when the execution of the meter effect is determined, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when the execution of the meter effect is determined. Further, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the increase timing of the first stage.

Further, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B, the reach effect E develops during the execution of the reach effect B. By executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by recognizing that the variable display result is not notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect B.

In the feature unit 029SG, as a pattern that develops from the reach effect B to the reach effect E, the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B. Although only the pattern to be performed (see FIG. 1-8 (F)) is disclosed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern that develops from the reach effect B to the reach effect E is the reach effect B. There may be a case where the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of. In this way, when the case where the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B is provided, the reach effect B is being executed. Reach production E The development suggestion production may be feasible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 to 11-34, the chance-up effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect A to the reach effect F, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. Expectations for big hits differ depending on the crab.

In particular, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η that executes the reach effect F after the reach effect A, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed twice in total during the execution of the reach effect A. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect, during the execution of the reach effect F, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image are displayed. It is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect over a total of three times of image display. For this reason, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the number of executions of the effects constituting the chance-up effect increases when the reach effect F is executed rather than when the reach effect A is executed. It is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the effect result of the effect F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the operation and cut of the movable body 32 are performed during the execution of the reach effect B. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect three times in total with the display of the in-image 029SG200, during the execution of the reach effect E, the reach title is displayed in red and movable as the chance-up effect. It is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect twice in total with the movement of the body 32. For this reason, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the reach effect is produced because the number of times the effect constituting the chance-up effect is executed is smaller during the reach effect E than during the reach effect B. Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the production result of E, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the feature unit 029SG, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the movable body are displayed during the execution of the reach effect B. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect three times in total, the operation of 32 and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, while the reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is used as the chance-up effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the effect B, the same number of effects that make up the chance-up effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect E as well as during the execution of the reach effect E. May be.

In the feature unit 029SG, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, light emission in a specific pattern of the game effect lamp 9, output of specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the light guide plate, and an image display device 5. The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) in the above, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, and the like may be included in the effect constituting the chance-up effect.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as the effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image, etc. All of them illustrate the production (active production) that is executed regardless of the operation of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player constitutes the chance-up production. An effect (active) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating an operating means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A (so-called back button). Direction) may be included.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-30, the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ is executed. It is possible to determine the reach effect of the super reach to be performed from the reach effect C and the reach effect D having a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect C. Then, when the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed and the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the reach effect is performed. When I is executed and the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of reach effect C or reach effect D, the reach with a lower expectation of big hit than reach effect I. Direction G is executed.

Further, when the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed and the reach effect H development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the reach effect I Since the reach effect H, which has a low expectation of a big hit, is executed, the effect can be diversified by combining the type of reach effect and the development notification effect.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are used. By deciding whether to execute the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the precursor effect is executed when the execution of the reach effect C is decided than when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Since the ratio of the reach effect I (high expectation reach effect development notification effect) to be executed after that is set high, the reach effect to be executed and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect have a predetermined relationship. It is possible to improve the production of reach production and development notification production.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, the reach effect to be executed is determined from the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the super reach ε, the super reach θ, the super reach ι, and the super reach κ. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect C is executed during the variable display and a variation pattern in which the reach effect D is executed during the variable display are individually specified. It may be provided in.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, the feature unit 029SG determines whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern at different ratios according to the variable display result. That is, the chance-up effect is the reach effect. As an example of the form executed as an effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit as the effect result of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and during the effect period of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. As for the feasible chance-up effect, it may be feasible as an effect suggesting that any one of reach effect E to reach effect I is executed (development to any of reach effect E to reach effect I). ..

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit and one of the reach effect E to the reach effect I is executed, the big hit game when the variable display result becomes a big hit. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10 rounds, that the game is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9, when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. When the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, the advance effect is executed because a common pre-effect can be executed during the period between the reach effect C or the reach effect D and the development notification effect. As a result, while raising the player's attention to the development notification effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the development notification effect is executed as the development notification effect, the high-expectation reach effect or the reach effect H development notification effect. You can improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-27 to 11-28, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Later, it suggests which of the reach production H development notification effect and the high expectation reach production development notification effect will be executed, and both the reach effect H development notification effect execution and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect execution. Since it is possible to execute the possible branch destination suggestion effect, while raising the player's attention to the fact that the development notification effect is executed by executing the development destination suggestion effect, the reach effect H development notification effect and High expectations Reach production It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the development notification productions is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, as the development destination suggestion effect, a form in which it is possible to suggest that the reach effect H development notification effect is executed and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest that the reach effect G development notification effect is executed as the development destination suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a development destination suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variation pattern for executing the reach effect C or the reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the reach effect A and the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the reach effect B, the development destination suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The variable display result is a big hit for the fluctuation pattern of κ and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed after the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. When this happens, the difference between the rate at which the reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ is 60%, whereas the variation pattern of the super reach θ Since the difference between the ratio at which the reach effect C is executed and the ratio at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of is 40%, the reach effect I depends on whether the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. Is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which is executed, or a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect H is executed, so that the reach effect C and the reach effect can be inferred. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In the feature unit 029SG, when the variable display result of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is a big hit, the reach effect C is displayed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the execution rate and the reach effect D execution rate is the difference between the rate at which the reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in the case where the variable display result is out of alignment. The difference between the ratio to be performed and the ratio to execute the reach effect D is larger than the difference between the ratio to execute the reach effect C and the ratio to execute the reach effect D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention includes any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a first reserved storage display area 029SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 029SG005U capable of displaying a reserved storage display are provided in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1, a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5). An active display area 029SG005F that can display the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display may be provided in the center).

Further, when the active display can be displayed in this way, a plurality of active display display modes are provided as in the above-mentioned look-ahead notice effect, and a big hit is expected depending on which display mode the active display is displayed. It may be possible to execute active display effects having different degrees. For example, when three types of display modes of active display are provided, a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the display mode of the active display is displayed as a red circle, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It suffices if the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when it is displayed in a high, white circle (big hit expectation in the display mode of active display: red> blue> white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the display mode of the active display is variable during execution due to the change of the red circle. It may be possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation of the display has increased.

When the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), the variable display result is the effect result of the reach effect B. Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E is executed after the (missing) is once notified, the display mode of the active display is changed from the white circle or the blue circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The changing rate of the red circle is P1.

Further, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A and the reach effect F is further executed, the active display is performed during the execution of the reach effect A. The rate at which the display mode of is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is P2, and the display mode of the active display is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red shape during the execution of the reach effect F. Let P3 be the rate at which the round shape changes.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect F, is displayed as the active display during the execution of the reach effect E. The mode is P1 which is the rate of change from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle, and the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect A is from the white circle or the blue circle to the red. It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η (when the reach effect A is executed and the reach effect F is executed), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be aware in advance that the reach effect F will be executed by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the start. Further, in the case where the reach effect E is executed and the case where the reach effect F is executed, the display mode of the active display is a red circle at a higher rate in the reach effect F, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect E. By changing to, the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red circle according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the display mode of the active display is changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the changing ratio P3 is higher than the ratio P2 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η as in the modified example 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during the execution of the reach effect F. The display mode of the active display changes from the white round shape or the blue round shape to the red round shape while the reach effect A is being executed. In addition to setting the ratio higher than P2, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The ratio P1 may be set higher than the ratio at which the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect B.

In this way, a plurality of modes are provided as the active display mode, and the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the jackpot expectation. , The display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the reach effect E development notification effect or the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, so that the player is recognized in advance that the jackpot expectation is high. It is possible to reduce the risk of deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ in which the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed without going through the reach effect such as the reach effect A and the reach effect B. However, as a modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display is changed from a white circle or a blue circle to red before the start of the reach effect I. The ratio P5 that changes to a round shape may be set higher than the ratio P6 that the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the reach effect I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle before the reach effect I is executed, the player is made to recognize in advance that the reach effect I is executed. Since it can be made easier, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach effect I. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the ratio P5 to be set is set higher than the ratio P6 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I. Not limited to this, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the reach effect I is executed without going through another reach effect even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle. It is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG and the modified example 029SG-1 to the modified example 029SG-3, three types of a white round shape, a blue round shape, and a red round shape are provided as display modes of the hold storage display and the active display. Although the embodiment in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the hold storage display or the active display is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display or the active display is not limited to this. The number of display modes may be only two or four or more.

Further, in the modified examples 029SG-1 to the modified example 029SG-3, an embodiment in which the display mode of the active display can be changed during the execution of the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and is active. The change timing of the display mode may include timings other than the execution of the reach effect, for example, the execution of the development suggestion effect and the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, and the like. Further, when it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including a temporary stop and a re-variable display of a decorative pattern during the variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or the re-variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, three types of a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle are provided as display modes of the hold storage display, depending on which display mode the hold storage display is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a shape, etc., it is suggested which of the reach effects E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, and reach effect I will be developed depending on which shape the hold memory display is displayed. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process and determines that the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is super reach, which of the super reach α to super reach λ is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach? (Which of the reach effect A to the reach effect I is to be executed during the variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command (which super reach variation pattern is to be executed) according to the determination is included. The variable category command) may be transmitted to the effect control board 12. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the display mode of the hold storage table display from a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, a star, or the like based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. .. In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the hold memory display even before the start of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form capable of suggesting a reach effect developed by the shape of the reserved storage display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the color of the reserved storage display is used. In addition to suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, the shape of the hold memory display may further suggest the reach effect of the development destination. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and the shape of the hold memory display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form in which the reach effect of the development destination can be suggested by the shape of the hold storage display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is developed by the shape of the hold storage display. The reach effect that can suggest the destination may be only a part of the reach effect E, the reach effect F, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I (for example, only the reach effect E and the reach effect I). ..

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effect A to the reach effect F as a chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black may be changed to red in the middle as a chance-up effect. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation degree image indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example). , The number of stars displayed as an expectation image may be increased, etc.). By doing so, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters in the reach title image changes from black to red, so that the attention to the expectation image can be increased. It is possible to make the player accurately recognize the degree of expectation of reach production.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although the embodiment in which the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined is illustrated at the same ratio as in the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach κ Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch destination suggestion effect are performed at different ratios depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It may be possible to determine the production pattern of.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as a modification 029SG-6, before the variable display result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect C during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high expectation reach effect is executed, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 15%. Determined, the execution in the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. Execution is determined at a rate of 35%. Further, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, when the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect D, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. The execution in the pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed (the non-execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower), the reach effect H is set during the execution of the variable display. It is possible to preferably suggest that the development notification effect such as the development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Although the embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set to be higher than that in the case where the above is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is obtained in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. When the execution of the effect C is determined, the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower than when the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. May be good.

In addition, in the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio in the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z (effect pattern suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect) is set higher than when it is determined, the variable display is being executed. In the above, it is possible to more preferably suggest that the development notification effect such as the reach effect H development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the super reach κ is illustrated, although the embodiment in which the execution decision ratio in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than that in the case of When the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of, the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is higher than the case where the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. The execution decision ratio may be set low.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 11-59, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although the embodiment in which the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined is illustrated at a different ratio from the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach θ, Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch are performed at different ratios depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C or the reach effect D. It may be possible to determine the production pattern of the above-mentioned suggestion effect.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-6, the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect C (the first advantageous result suggestion effect in the invention 033SG) and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect D. Although (the second advantageous result suggestion effect in the invention 033SG) is exemplified as an effect that can be executed as an effect of the same effect mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is being executed. The branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect D may be feasible as an effect of a different effect mode.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the reach effect E to the reach effect I can be selected. As for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-7, reach effect A to reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of super reach, and any one of reach effect E to reach effect I. Regarding the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into, in addition to the first notification mode, after being notified that the variable display result is once out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. A second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) may be provided in which the variable display result is notified as a big hit.

As described above, as the reach effect of the super reach, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. When the notification mode and the second notification mode are provided, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode. The ratio is the same as the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. May be good.

In this way, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the second notification mode is a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. By providing the above, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player by being notified again that the variable display result is a big hit even though the variable display result is once notified that the variable display result is out of order. Further, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect depending on whether the effect result (variable display result) when the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed is notified in the first notification mode or the second notification mode. Since the process for determining the above can be standardized, the amount of data required for the process can be suppressed.

In this modification 029SG-7, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the modes, the branch destination suggestion effect is a pattern when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode. The ratio of execution in Z and the ratio of branch destination suggestion effect executed in pattern Z when the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode are Although the same embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and any one of the reach effect E to the reach effect I is performed. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into, the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D is the first notification mode. The ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when notified in, and the branch destination when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The ratio at which the suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z may be different.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. Regarding the modes, the first notification mode in which any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the variable display result is temporarily removed as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. As -8, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after being notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are performed. Is executed, and it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect G (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ big hit). The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is variable in which the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. It may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed on the display. By doing so, when the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, the execution ratio of the chance-up effect depends on whether the reach effect G is executed before the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit. Because it is possible to make different games, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in this modification, the ratio of the chance-up effect being executed during the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is the second notification mode in which the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D is. Although a form different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is illustrated in the variable display notified in, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is in progress. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of effect patterns, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed depending on which effect pattern the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. High expectations Reach production We have illustrated a form in which the rate at which the development notification production is executed differs. In particular, in the feature unit 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is limited to this. When the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99% rate).

In particular, in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at an extremely high rate when the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the branch destination suggestion effect is the effect pattern. When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed even though it is executed in Z, or when the reach effect I is executed even though the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed (so-called). A pattern of production contradiction) may be provided. When such a pattern of effect contradiction is provided, the branch destination suggestion effect or reach effect I in the effect pattern Z is executed only when it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player, and when the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z or the reach effect I is executed, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are further notified. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the above is executed, an example is shown in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are different. Not limited to this, as in the modified example 029SG-10, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D may be the same for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing so, in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect D is executed, the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Since the player can expect that the reach effect development notification effect is executed after it is performed, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 029SG-10, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are the same for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the variable display result is (missing) as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect D is executed. ) Is notified, and if it is possible to achieve an effect that the player can expect that the reach effect development notification effect is executed, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are achieved. Is small (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D. Are almost the same) and may be different.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are further notified. For the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which is executed, the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect C is decided is smaller than the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, when it is decided to execute the reach effect C for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The jackpot expectation may be the same as the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect D is determined. By doing so, in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect is executed, when the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, the variable display result is obtained as the effect result of the reach effect G. Since the player can expect to be notified that the game will be a big hit, the game entertainment can be improved.

In this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the jackpot when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Although the embodiment in which the degree of expectation is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is executed and the reach effect is executed in both cases. Reach if it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed. The difference between the jackpot expectation of the production C and the jackpot expectation of the reach production D is small (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation of the reach production C and the jackpot expectation of the reach production D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the reach production. The jackpot expectation of C and the jackpot expectation of reach effect D may be substantially the same).

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the stick as the operation promotion image are used as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. The image of the controller 31A can be displayed, and the reach effect E development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect A to reach effect D, and the reach effect E development notification effect and high expectation are executed before the reach effect development notification effect. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F executed before the reach effect development notification effect. As a modification 029SG-12, a common effect of the red display of these reach titles and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the height. By doing so, while suppressing the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as the chance-up effect (the number of effect patterns of the chance-up effect), the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are the execution of either reach effect. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not he / she is squeezed inside, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect of the chance-up effect are different depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Although the form in which the pattern can be determined has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect are any one of reach effect E to reach effect I. May be determined at different rates depending on whether or not is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13, the high expectation reach effect development notification is made before the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the effect and the reach effect I are executed, the chance-up effect is performed at different ratios depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the execution of the reach effect D is decided. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute. In particular, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, when the execution of the reach effect D is decided, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a higher rate than when the execution of the reach effect C is decided. When the execution of the reach effect D is decided, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode in which the variable display result is once again notified that the variable display result is a big hit after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. An embodiment in which (a so-called resurrection mode) is provided is illustrated, but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (A) as a modified example 029SG-14, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order. After that, a revival effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit between the variable display stop timing and the like.

In particular, when the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D (variation of any one of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ). When variable display is executed in the pattern and a big hit is obtained), as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the effect period of the revival effect is set to reach effect. When the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of B (variable by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ). (When display is executed) Reach effect E The length of the period from the start timing of the development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (variable display result notification timing) L22, and the effect results of reach effect C and reach effect D. When the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the reach effect G development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed after being notified that the variable display result is out of order (variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ). If the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G (variable display result notification timing) is set shorter than L23, the effect becomes redundant. It may be possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above (L22> L21, L23> 21).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the effect period of the revival effect is set from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect to the reach effect E development notification effect. By setting it shorter than the length L32 of the period until the end timing of, or the length L33 from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G development notification effect, the variable display result can be displayed. It is possible to give unexpectedness to the notification that it is out of order.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-14, a mode in which the revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is illustrated. When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect F are executed from the execution of the reach effect A (variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η and becomes a big hit). In the case), when the advance effect, the precursor effect, the reach effect H development notification effect, and the reach effect H are executed from the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D (variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι). When the reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed, the advance effect, the precursor effect, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, and the reach effect I are executed (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ). In the case where the display is executed and a big hit is obtained), a case where the revival effect is executed may be provided.

As shown in the feature unit 029SG, the ratio of the reach effect A to the reach effect D being executed and becoming a big hit (the degree of expectation of a big hit) is such that the reach effect F, the reach effect G, and the reach effect I are executed and the big hit. Since it is set lower than the ratio (big hit expectation), when the variable display result is a big hit, it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order as the effect result of reach effect A to reach effect D. By setting the ratio at which the revival effect is executed after that to be higher than the ratio at which the reach effect F, the reach effect G, and the reach effect I are executed and become a big hit, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed and variable. Even when it is notified that the display result is out of alignment, the player may be able to pay attention to the execution of the resurrection effect.

In addition, after the reach effect B is once notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect B, the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect E are executed to become a big hit. In the case (when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ and a big hit is obtained), or when it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G The revival effect is also executed when the development suggestion effect, the reach effect G, the development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed and a big hit is obtained (when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ and the big hit is obtained). A case may be provided, but in the case where the variable display is executed with these fluctuation patterns of super reach ζ and super reach θ, it is notified that the variable display result will be out of order once before the revival effect. In order to suppress the risk that the effect will be redundant and the game entertainment will be reduced by being notified twice or more that the variable display result will be out of order as the effect of the reach effect, super reach ζ or super If the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of reach θ and it becomes a big hit, the revival effect is not executed, or the fluctuation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ The revival effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the time can be controlled to a shorter time after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the variable display is executed is a specific number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.). ) May be controlled in a time-saving state, or in the case where the variable display result is out of order, it may be possible to control in a time-saving state according to the fact that some of the outliers are derived and displayed. good.

In particular, in this case, when the variable display is controlled to the time saving state when the number of executions reaches a specific number of times, or when the time saving state is controlled according to the derivation display of a part of the deviation. , The high expectation reach effect development notification effect shown in the feature unit 029SG, or the effect of notifying that the time is controlled after the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 may be executed. .. By doing so, when controlling the time saving state according to the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number of times, or when controlling the time saving state according to the derivation display of a part of the deviation. , High expectation reach effect Whether it is controlled to a shorter time state by executing development notification effect or revival effect, or whether it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, reach effect with high expectation such as reach effect I Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as the feature portion 029SG, an embodiment in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are implemented is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG is implemented. You may try to do it.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. As a suggestion effect suggesting that the gaming machine 1) is controlled to the advantageous state, the special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and the degree of expectation that the special suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state are higher. A low first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including the effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) and the effect result of the first suggestion effect are notified. It is possible to execute the special development effect as the first development pattern before (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the reach effect A is high from the execution. Expectation level reach effect The part where the development notification effect is executed), and after being notified that the effect is not controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the effect of the second suggestion effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect is performed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the reach effect E develops after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B. The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and the development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of at least the special development effect. (For example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) can be executed by the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23. In the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined, and in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-29. After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the portion that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), the launching means capable of launching the game medium into the game area according to the operation of the player, and the above. Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, The guide display means for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using the image display is provided, and the suggestion effect execution means is described by the development effect execution means. When the first development pattern is executed, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example, FIG. 11-8). As described above, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed), by the development effect execution means. When the second development pattern is executed, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ. In the variable display, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the development suggestion effect execution means. Can execute the special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect as the development suggestion effect during both the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect. Yes (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, the execution of the reach effect A in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, the super reach β, the super reach δ, the super reach ζ, and the super reach η. The middle and the part where the meter effect can be executed while the reach effect B is being executed), the effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9). As shown, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect), and the special development effect is the visibility of the effect image. (For example, the blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) and the effect executed after the first effect, in which the previous stage information is visually displayed. The second effect (for example, the first-stage effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) and the second-stage information that is executed after the second effect and has a higher degree of emphasis than the first-stage information can be visually recognized. After the special development effect is executed, including the third effect that can be displayed (for example, the latter stage effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55). The period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled is shorter than the period until the notification that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is shorter (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L13 from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) and the high expectation level. The length L12 from the start timing of the reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F is from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (notification timing of the variable display result). A portion set longer than the length L11 of the period), the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and in the guidance display means, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. In the predetermined period after the above, the second guidance display is performed before the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed, and the advantageous state is displayed. After the completion of the name display, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated and the second guidance display is continued. A gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

According to such a configuration, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the game is caused by an excessively long period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is controlled. In addition to being able to suppress the decline in interest, when the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the player is suitably given a special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special suggestion effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it is possible to pay attention to, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the player's special development effect is executed by the special development suggestion effect. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction to urge the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

That is, the length of the effect period and the period from the execution of the development effect to the notification that the development effect is controlled to the advantageous state change depending on the type of the development effect, and the appropriate length is applied according to the type of the development effect. Since the development effect and the notification of being controlled to the advantageous state are executed during the effect period of, the game entertainment can be improved, and the first guidance display is performed in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. And the second guide display emphasize the instruction to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction, and then instruct to take over the second guide display and launch the game ball in the predetermined direction without taking over the first guide display. By not overemphasizing the instruction, it is possible not to feel annoyed, and moreover, the second guidance display is first performed to instruct to conservatively launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, and then the advantageous state. After recognizing the name of, it is possible to firmly instruct to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction by the first guidance display. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of development effects in an appropriate length of effect period when installed in a game field, and in an easy-to-understand instruction of a direction in which a game ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine, which can improve the game entertainment by the development effect and can suitably execute the instruction to urge the player to shoot the gaming ball in a predetermined direction, the variable display is displayed. A launching means that can control a game machine to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result becomes a specific display result, and can launch a game medium into the game area according to the operation of the player, and the game. Of the first flow path and the second flow path in which the game medium can flow down in the area, a guidance display is used to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path. The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means includes, in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. The second guidance display is performed before the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed, and the second guidance display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed. 1 Guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued, and the control of the advantageous state is completed. In the special state after the above, a gaming machine that continues the second guidance display can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 13 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 13 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as the "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is related to the set value when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is a probable change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

<Explanation of feature 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 075F of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-60.

[Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature unit 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 15-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as “)”. Usually referred to as a big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in the space between the gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is equipped with a large winning opening door, and by sliding open and close the large winning opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the route to the normal large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Will be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 15-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as “)”. Forming a V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the route to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 15-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. .. By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probable change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the gaming board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided above the attacker in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and the left side of the image display device 5. It is equipped with a board left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d has a character attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this example) when a lighting means such as an LED is turned on or blinks when the movable body 32 is stopped or in an operating state. "XXX") is made to emit light. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light in the vicinity of the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light in the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a housing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED is turned on or blinks, the housing imitating the character on the right side of the image display device 5 is made to emit light. .. The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light in the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a housing imitating a character, similarly to the panel right lamp 075F009F. Further, the panel right lamp 075F009F and the panel left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a frame lamp composed of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. To prepare for.

Here, FIG. 15-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp in a counterclockwise direction from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R emits light in the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the normal symbol display 20, as shown in FIG. 1, It is a board that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED.

Here, FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special LED substrate 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 15-3 (a), the special figure LED substrate 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable showing the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and special figure 2 storage display unit indicating the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. 075F024, the normal map storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of reserved normal symbols, the normal map display unit 075F026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 that urges the player to hit right. It is provided with a probability variation display unit 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display unit 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display unit 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit may notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special figures or ordinary symbols, the result, the current gaming state, the number of pending numbers, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED board 075F020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 075F030. In the present embodiment, when the player is urged to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not urged to hit right. That is, when urging the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left region of the gaming area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is present ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big winning opening) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). Flow into. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 075F030 urges the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by inserting a game ball into a normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player can make a right-handed hit while the display prompting the right-handed hit is made. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probable change state. For this reason, the player may have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. It should be noted that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the number of second reserved storages, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status of the second special figure or A special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 showing a display result and a right-handed display unit 075F055 for urging the player to hit right are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of. Hereinafter, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, expressing the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / extinguishing command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 15-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 15-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L , It is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) by the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 15-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 075F005D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays. It constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second hold storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that a special symbol is being variablely displayed, a display of a first reserved storage number, and a display of a second reserved storage number. is doing.

Of these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and variable display of decorative patterns can be executed. It has become. Further, a small symbol 075F005M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small symbols are the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left", the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C in "middle", and the decorative symbol display area on "right". The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols displayed on the 5R are vertically arranged in parallel. Further, the small symbol 075F005M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15-5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 075F005M is the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern in the part. Therefore, the visibility of the small design 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative design.

Further, in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display is provided.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-6 to 15-8.

(Big hit type)
FIG. 15-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 15-6, in the hit type table, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot gaming state are shown for each type of hit in the jackpot. , And the number of open times (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variable jackpots, and 10R probability variable jackpots are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize (for example, the control or lid that shortens the time to open the lid for opening and closing the V jackpot is shorter than the predetermined time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In a normal jackpot, the condition that such a low-accuracy high-base state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 fluctuation displays or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 5R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have a common decorative symbol that stops when a jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have the same fanfare effect (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs, and during the round of the jackpot game state. The mode of effect of the round effect (for example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred as far as the stopped decorative pattern, the fanfare effect, and the round effect are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variation big hit, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 4Rth). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state.

As described above, in the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also referred to as chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variation jackpot, the V jackpot opens in the predetermined round (9Rth in the present embodiment) as in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a decorative pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs, a fanfare production mode (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) and a round production performed during the round of the jackpot game state. The effect mode is different from the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability variation jackpot is also referred to as a special bonus.

(Each random number)
FIG. 15-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 15-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter that determines the jackpot type to be either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 10R probability variable jackpot (for determining the jackpot type). Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the variation pattern type) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) whether or not the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Then, out of a plurality of types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot as a jackpot gaming state, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10R probability variation jackpot, which jackpot is to be selected is based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4). Is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, in the case of loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a fluctuation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type differs depending on whether the display result is in the time saving state or not (in the time saving state, compared with the case where the time saving state is not achieved). Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set high), so that when the time is shortened, compared to when the time is not shortened. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be variablely displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number shortening control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than that in the hold number shortening control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 15-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 15-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 15-8 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the right of FIG. 15-8 (B). Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) are set than in the probability variation jackpot determination table. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 15-8 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in) is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 15-8 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

15-8 (B) and 15-8 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 15-8 (B) is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 15-8 (C) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining a big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8 (B), numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination, such as "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and , The jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10R probability variation jackpot" is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8 (C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-8 (B) and 15-8, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Will be. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 display the stopped big hit symbol by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as the LED in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. Can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot symbol can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the percentage of "10R probability variation jackpot" selected for the jackpot of the second special symbol is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable in the first special symbol, and the player The rate at which a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is selected is high.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 15-9 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variation jackpot is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined. Loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variation jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variation jackpot designation command, or these are collectively referred to as 8C system commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command that specifies the initialization (designates to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probabilistic state specification command for designating the background of the probabilistic state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of a 5R normal jackpot. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command for designating the start of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designated command, the jackpot start 2 designated command, and the jackpot start 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closure of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command for designating the end of the 5R normal jackpot. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command for designating the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designated command, the jackpot end 2 designated command, and the jackpot end 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command for designating that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning prize designation command for designating that there was a first start winning prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the jackpot determination, the jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) in which the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value among the determination results at the time of winning. Is.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to send the data to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 15-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (second special). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the symbol (step 075FS001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step 075FS002). If a predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area is "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step 075FS004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating "second" (that is, the data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). 1 Set the data indicating "first" in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of step 075FS004 to step 075FS006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is the second. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command of the side indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step 075FS009). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 15-8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of big hit judgment values is probablely changed between the big hit judgment table at the time of probability change (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 15-8 (A) is set) in which a large number of big hit judgment values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 15-8 (A) is set), which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in a state or a time-saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 15-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 15-8 (C). One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (B). Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8 (C) when the special symbol pointer indicates "second".

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number for determining the jackpot type extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and holds the random number using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 15-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined by step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 15-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type when the jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the loss pattern variation pattern. Select the type judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select any one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. To decide.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 controls to send the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 15-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) is updated (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 15-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 15-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbol (step 075FS301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 075F021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the change of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and between rounds are performed for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step 075FS307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set (step 075FS309). .. If the time reduction flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step 075FS311 (N in step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability change flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the transition of the gaming state from the reduced working hours state to the normal state (low probability / low base state), and in step 075FS316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without processing step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS316), and the processing is terminated.

(Pre-processing for opening big hits)
FIG. 15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 15-14, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 15-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process proceeds to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 15-16 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIGS. 15-16, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. (For example, the time for notifying in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process is performed. To finish.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), the designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the big winning opening (step 075FS605), and the round is sent to the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V open winning opening (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the opening of the normal large winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), the solenoid 075F083 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 15-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 15-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step 075FS704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game state is the probability change, the time saving, or the normal game state by the probability change state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Production processing during big hit)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 15-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit middle effect processing. As shown in FIG. 15-18, in the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the effect control CPU 120 when the data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot ends. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, the control of the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data set next (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display the image corresponding to the effect during the round in the image display device 5. .. Further, in order to control lighting / blinking / extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Then, the process is terminated.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continuously controlled according to the set process data contents. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process is terminated.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the process corresponding to the fanfare effect is to execute the fanfare effect under the control of the effect device. Set the data. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is used to urge the player to right-handed. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the big winning opening opening designated command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of big hits, the effect control device executes the effect during the round as follows. In order to do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of a 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set the process data of. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102). The jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability change suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion effect (see FIGS. 15-41). To set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102). The jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability change suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the V notice that the next 4R is the V open round is announced. Process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 15-42) is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103). The jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 15-43) aiming at the V aiming at the thing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A203). The jackpot round (in this case, 3R) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set. The effect aimed at V is a guidance display using an image display relating to the V large winning opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the production aiming at V, an image urging the player to hit right is displayed so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V large winning opening which is a specific area. In the production aiming at V, an image pointing to the V large winning opening itself, which is a specific area, may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V large winning opening, which is a specific area, may be displayed. , An image pointing to the route leading to the V-large winning opening, which is a specific area, may be displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the large winning opening opening designated command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 continues to aim at V and execute the effect (see FIGS. 15-44). Set the process data for. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104). The jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect corresponding to the specified jackpot round (in this case, the effect aiming at V) is set.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A108 command) for opening the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 8R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs a V advance notice effect to announce that the next 9R is the V open round. Set the process data to execute. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108). The jackpot round (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the production aiming at V that aims at that. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A208). The jackpot round (8R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the large winning opening opening designated command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the process data for continuously aiming at V and executing the effect is set. .. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A109). The jackpot round (9R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the output control CPU 120 receives the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning effect is executed in order to execute the V winning effect under the control of the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 15-44) when the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) is received from the CPU 103 during the 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. ..

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the process data for executing the V winning effect is set.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the effect control effect (FIGS. 15-46, FIG. 15) indicates the end of the jackpot game state. -47) Set the process data to execute.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103. Perform the production of.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. Regarding the content of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature section 075F has the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game of the portion related to the feature section 075F will be particularly described below. do.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first launches a gaming ball by left-handing toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the gaming area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variable jackpots, and 10R probability variable jackpots. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that urges the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt right-handed by lighting, for example, a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10 times in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal big prize opening is open at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5Rth, but the V big winning opening is open only at the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize, the V prize is not won. Further, since the V prize is not won, the effect of aiming at V is not executed on the 4th round, and the same background image as the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and at the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is executed is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion effect, it is notified that it is a normal jackpot instead of a probability variation jackpot. After that, the V prize opening is opened on the 4th R, but the V prize does not occur, and the normal large winning opening is opened on the subsequent 5R, and the ending effect is executed when the 5R is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and at the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is present. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is a V open round is executed. In the 4th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 5th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 5th round is finished, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th Rths and the 10th Rth, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th Rth. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds, and at the 7th round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is executed is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is finished, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal big hit and 150 times in the case of 5R probability change big hit and 10R probability change big hit). Will be done. Further, in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state is in the probability variation state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled in the time saving state. Is controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the low accuracy high base state, and in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the high accuracy high base state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special map fluctuation time (period in which the special map is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal map is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As a type of jackpot in the second special figure game, as described above, there is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 has continued from the time of the first hit.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Since it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th Rths and the 10th Rth, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th Rth. Specifically, as in the case of the first hit, the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is finished, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state and the probable change state (high accuracy high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is finished, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probable change state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 is also completed. As a result, the player will launch the game ball toward the first flow path through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 15-19 to 15-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described. FIG. 15-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the hit fluctuation. FIG. 15-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. FIG. 15-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that FIGS. 15-19 to 15-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 15-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 issues a hold storage number designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (C1 system command), background specification command (95 system command), symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decorative symbol in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, or may perform a variable effect in accordance with the fluctuation of the first special symbol (for example, reach effect, advance notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute process data.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the first reserved storage display area 075F005D by specifying the first reserved storage number based on the hold storage number designation command, or the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051. To update. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the change of the special symbol starts based on the symbol variation designation command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence / absence of a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the display result designation command, and determines the decorative design corresponding to the presence / absence of the big hit. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the effect content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach) based on the variable pattern designation command. Set the type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol determination command.

When a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 issues a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120 at t3 thereafter. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image congratulating the big hit on the image display device 5 or outputs a sound congratulating the big hit from the speakers 8L and 8R as a fanfare effect. Set the process data for. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image prompting right-handed striking on the image display device 5 and outputs a sound prompting right-handed striking from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed striking promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-20, when the big hit round starts at t4 after that, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening, and at the same time, the production control CPU 120 is given a command to specify that the big winning opening is open (A101 command). To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the first round.

After that, when the first R is completed at t5, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A201 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and sends a command (A102 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the second round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIGS. 15-41) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the second R is completed at t7, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A202 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and sends a command (A103 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3rd round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V notice effect (see FIGS. 15-42) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the third R is completed at t9, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the inter-round effect between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 15-43) aiming at V based on the designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 15-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening, and at the same time, the production control CPU 120 is given a command to specify that the large winning opening is open (A104 command). To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V notice effect (see FIGS. 15-42) based on a command (A104 command) during which the large winning opening is open, and then aims at V (see FIG. 15-43). Set the process data to execute.

After that, when the V prize is generated at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 15-44).

After that, when the 4th round is completed at t12, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A204 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 5th R starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and sends a command (A105 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th R is completed at t14, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A205 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic change state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether or not the number of reserved storages exceeds 0.

For example, in t16, when the reserved storage number exceeds 0, the CPU 103 specifies the reserved storage number designation command (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decorative symbol in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, or may perform a variable effect in accordance with the fluctuation of the second special symbol (for example, reach effect, advance notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute process data.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 15-60) that can identify that the game is not performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern on the image display device 5, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 15-60, and the game is such that the game is not performed, such as a character image or a logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Any production may be used as long as it can be identified by a person.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 15-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting mode of the lamp. In the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L). , The right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off, as shown in FIG. 15-22 (A). It is represented by.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp). 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all lit as shown in FIG. 15-22 (B). It is expressed in the aspect of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp). 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each light / blink / blink in an manner according to the effect or the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state of turning off the light is represented by a hatching mode as shown in FIG. 15-22 (C).

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. 15-23 to 15-33 and 15-38 to 15-50 are explanatory views showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game.

As shown in FIG. 15-23 (a), when the lost symbol is stopped due to the change of the special symbol of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the stop of the lost symbol. After that, when there is a first hold storage number, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) to the effect control CPU 120. ), Display result specification command (8C system command), and fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decorative symbol in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or the effect during fluctuation in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol (for example). , Reach production, notice production, etc.) are executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-23 (b1) to 15-24 (b3) as a hold storage number designation command (C1 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), and a background specification command (95 system command). Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-23 (b1) and 15-24 (b3) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-23 (b2), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting. Send a command (FD command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-24 (c1) to 15-38 (d2) as a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-24 (c1) and 15-38 (d2) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

Here, the fanfare production will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare production includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The blessing part is a production part in which a production for congratulating the big hit is executed, and as will be described later in FIG. 15-24 (c1), an image for congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be a lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. The name display part is a production part that notifies the player of the start of the jackpot round by notifying the name of the generated jackpot gaming state and also informs the player of the type of the generated jackpot gaming state. FIG. As will be described later in -24 (c2) and (c3), a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state may be displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The right-handed promotion part is an effect part that encourages the player to hit right-handed, and as will be described later in FIGS. 15-24 (c4) to 15-33 (c29), the image display of characters and figures is used. A large right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to hit right is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol has stopped and the symbol has been confirmed, and then receives the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , The fanfare production is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal big prize opening opens and the big hit round starts.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1), as a blessing part in the fanfare production, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed as an image. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5 or a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode is such that the lighting mode congratulates the big hit. Or something. Further, as a right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion is performed by displaying an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character of "right-handed") in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5. The production is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed in each layer. As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect is an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, "Congratulations!" Along with the character image. It is displayed in the layer on the front side (direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) rather than the character image). Further, in the fanfare effect, a sound prompting right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed hitting promotion effect, the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 promotes right-handed hitting. (Lights up in this example). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), and lights the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the small right-handed display promotion effect is based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). The image display device 5 displays an image composed of figures and characters in the above, and an image congratulating the big hit. At this time, the image consisting of the figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect located on the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big hit. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. Will be done up to. At that time, first, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display / extinguishing command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed display promotion effect based on the received background specification command. When it is finished, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. The image composed of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. By doing so, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055. Becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare production, a part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot gaming state (in this example, among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!" "CHANGE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, the sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. 15-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot gaming state (in this example). "BONUS !!") in the character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, the character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot gaming state. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off ahead of the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 15-24 (c4) to FIG. 15-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character of "right-handed"). ) Is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5, and a large right-handed promotion effect is executed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 15-34 to 15-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs guidance light emission that urges the player to hit the right side by moving the light emitting part of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In the present embodiment, the light emitting portion literally refers to a portion that emits light, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lit lamp is located is referred to as a light emitting portion, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is turned off) is located is not called the light emitting part. In another example, the light emitting portion refers to a portion that emits light with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light emitting place is located may not be called the light emitting place. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 15-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIGS. 15-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the production time of each of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is specified. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is configured to execute a fanfare effect for 9880 msec and then a large right-handed promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right-handed promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 decides to repeat the large right-handed promotion effect of 2000 msec twice. Become.

FIG. 15-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIGS. 15-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, each time of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is subdivided and referred to in each time zone. The grandchild table is specified.

Here, the grandchild table W11 common to each other is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L for the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the large right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so that no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. For the attacker lamp 9c, 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, is further subdivided into a plurality of periods, and a plurality of grandchild tables are designated. For example, the grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, the grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and the grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

15-36 and 15-37 are explanatory views showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 15-36 shows the data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIGS. 15-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all lamps are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). The data of turning off (0x000000) is specified in. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 15-2 are specified for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, in FIGS. 15-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, the data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and the data (000) at the timing of ending lighting are used. On the other hand, a broken line circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp lights up, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T4, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T5, and then the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T6. The lamp lights up, then the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T7, then the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T8, and then the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T9. It lights up, then the 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T10, and then the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T11. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first, the 4th lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T46, then the 3rd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the 2nd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T54, the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect has elapsed. It should be noted that the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect after all the lamps are turned off at T56 is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time (1000 msec). It is T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L, and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 in which the data as described above is stored, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , Frame right lamp Up to the 8th lamp of 075F009R, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. The large right-handed promotion effect by such a frame lamp is performed twice.

FIGS. 15-37 show the data in the grandchild tables K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIGS. 15-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all of them are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Data for turning off the lamp (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X). Data is specified for each of the above. Further, in FIGS. 15-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, the data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and the data (000) at the timing of ending lighting. ) Is marked with a broken line circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable body lamp is lit at T5. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Turns off. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect has elapsed. It should be noted that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and then turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. It is (T57). Further, as compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

If the grandchild table K11 in which the data as described above is stored is used, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L can be used. While it is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. After that, each lamp continues to light in seven colors, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Turns off. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is lit in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side, starting from the lighting of the left X to the lamp of the middle X and the lamp of the right X. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIGS. 15-37 show the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIGS. 15-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on, and the data is turned off. The data of (0x000000) is specified.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec with respect to 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec. Repeat the color change of the pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 320 msec to be turned on, and the data of turning off (0x0000000) is specified as the data. There is.

When the large right-handed promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. The attacker lamp 9c is made to repeat the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to it a plurality of times, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned off by referring to the grandchild table A11c over the last 320 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on, then the frame lamp is turned off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Will turn off. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Further, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the color is turned off at the beginning, the color of a predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and then the color is turned off, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on 3 times. It is not necessary to prepare data for all the time from the beginning to the end for lighting of 2000 msec by repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for the repetition of the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle while making a scenario by dividing it into stages. , It is sufficient to prepare the data of only the repeating part. Therefore, the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 15-25 (c4), an effect mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4), in the image display device 5, the tip of an arrow image directed to the right is displayed. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c5), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed in the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-26 (c6), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed in the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-26 (c7), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed in the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-26 (c8), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed in the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-29 (c15), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts to light. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-29 (c16), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" continues to be displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-29 (c17), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c18), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c19), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c20), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c21), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c22), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c24), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the blinking attacker lamp 9c is also turned off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the first series of large right-handed promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c26), the second large right-handed promotion effect starts. At this time, as for the game effect lamp 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In the second large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect. As a result, when shifting to the jackpot round after the jackpot promotion effect is completed, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) in the jackpot round and the sound in the jackpot promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second large right-handed promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on / blinked / extinguished in the same manner as the first large right-handed promotion effect. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to right-handed in a manner that emphasizes it more than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, by executing the large right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a cure sound effect) in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect, which is effective for the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed strikes, in the second big right-handed strike promotion effect, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed strike promotion effect, so the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that. Can be prevented from interfering with.

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion effect, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 effectively encourages right-handed hitting by lighting or blinking the lamp. Yes, the effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2). For example, the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect appears one character at a time, but all the character images appear at once in the character image in the name image in the big hit game state. Further, the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect is larger than that of all the character images in the name image in the big hit game state. Further, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big hit game state is displayed and the player is notified that the big hit has occurred, the player can be notified by further emphasizing the right-handed hit by the big right-handed promotion effect.

Since the attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and aims at the time of launching the game ball, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a flashy color such as seven colors and is easily recognized by the player, and blinks. It is possible to draw more attention to the player's aim. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without blinking.

In the following example, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R probability variation jackpot, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, the 5 normal jackpots differ in that the V advance notice effect and the V winning effect are not executed, but other effects and the like are the same as the 5R probability variation big hits.

As shown in FIG. 15-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is turned off and the second big right-handed promotion effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c27), the switch to the big hit round is switched. Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!" fade out, so that the visibility is gradually lowered. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command), a series of effect data up to the stage of FIG. 15-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-39 (d3) to 15-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command) during the opening of the big winning opening. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-39 (d3) and 15-40 (e4) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in the image display called "transition". "Transition" is a switch that is inserted between the first cut and the second cut when the scene of the video is switched from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It is an effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to the second degree (for example, 0) lower than the first degree. % And 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 100% (first degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to make the object (image) opaque, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually lower the rate) are not fade-ins. When the opacity (which can be said to be opaque) is changed instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned% value is reversed. That is, in the fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) higher than the second degree. ) Will be changed over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99) higher than the first degree. %) Is changed over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) transparently, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-outs. When changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), in the fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is set to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) To a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) lower than the first degree, over a predetermined time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!" When the rate) is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%, so that the arrow image and the characters "Right-handed !!" The image is gradually made transparent to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen located behind the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%. By gradually lowering it to, the background image during the jackpot round is gradually made opaque to make it easier to see (fade in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer of the screen is shown to the player.

As a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". Crossfade is, for example, by fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. As an appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image always displayed in the second layer of the screen located on the back side. Is shown once during the switching from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, so that it is different from the method such as crossfade.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without receiving. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the small right-handed promotion can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) of the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), after the background image during the big hit round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal big winning opening is usually opened. , A background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed. Furthermore, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in a mode corresponding to the effect during the round. As described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect has already been completed.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, an image of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. Arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e3), when the first round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A201 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e4), the large winning opening is normally kept closed during the round, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, it continues. An image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A102 command) for opening the winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the second round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) to 15-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-41 (e5) and 15-42 (e8) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5), when the second round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right is continued. An image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e6), the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed during 2R. Specifically, the character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the image prompting the operation of the push button 31B so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion effect, the V is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. A character image of "Success !!" is displayed as an effect to notify that it is a probable change jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e8), when the second round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A202 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e9), during the round, the large winning opening is normally kept closed, and the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is overlapped with the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. The text image of "Success !!" is displayed, and the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A103 command) for opening the winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-42 (e10) to 15-43 (e12) based on the command (A103 command) during the opening of the large winning opening. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-42 (e10) and 15-43 (e12) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened and the V notice effect is executed. Specifically, the character image of "grab V in the next round !!" is displayed together with the character image so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e11), during the 3Rs, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is overlapped with the character image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character image of "grab V in the next round !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e12), when the 3Rs are completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 aims at V and executes the effect during the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13), during the rounds, the effect is executed aiming at V while the large winning opening is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large) is a target (place) aimed at the player by right-handed by overlapping the background image according to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the effect aimed at V, it is possible to urge the player to right-handed to let the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by using the image display related to the V-large winning opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A104 command) for opening the winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command) during the opening of the large winning opening. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-44 (e14) and 15-44 (e15) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large winning opening is opened, and the production is continuously aimed at V. As a result, the player will aim for the V-large winning opening by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

As shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e15), during 4R, the effect of aiming at V is executed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the game ball enters the V large winning opening and the V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 15-44 (e16) to 15-45 (e18) based on the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-44 (e16) and 15-45 (e18) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), when the V prize effect is executed, the V prize is generated by overlapping the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The image of "V" is displayed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.).

As shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e17), when the 4th round is completed, the V large winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A204 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e18), the V large winning opening and the normal large winning opening remain closed between rounds, and overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and further, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A105 command) for opening the winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-45 (e19) to 15-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-45 (e19) and 15-46 (e21) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right is continued. An image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIGS. 15-46 (e20), during 5R, the effect during the round is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be in the upper right. (Arrows and letters) are displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A205 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening. Further, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 15-46 (f1) to 15-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-46 (f1) and 15-47 (f4) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIGS. 15-46 (f1), when the ending effect is started, an image for selecting the stage in the probable change state after the big hit game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image (in this example, a character image of “Dream RUSH !!”) showing the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character image. It is displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-47 (f3), the immersive suppression notification effect is executed during the ending effect. Specifically, an image for preventing the player from being enthusiastic about the game, such as "Be careful about immersing yourself. Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately." Is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. At the time of consecutive hits, a game result image showing the result of the game in the big hit game state (for example, the number of prize balls) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first hit. Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f4), an image for preventing forgetting to take a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is completed, if there is a second hold storage number, the CPU 103 requests the effect control CPU 120 with a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decorative symbol in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or the effect during fluctuation in accordance with the variation of the second special symbol (for example). , Reach production, notice production, etc.) are executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-48 (g1) and (g2) as a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), and a symbol variation specification command. Set based on (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g1), even during the change of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in an manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g2), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, in the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop.

When there is a second reserved storage number after the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 issues a reserved storage number designation command (C2 series command) and a background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , The symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decorative symbol in a variable manner in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or the effect during fluctuation in accordance with the variation of the second special symbol (for example). , Reach production, notice production, etc.) are executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 15-48 (g3) to 15-49 (g5) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), and a background specification command (95 system command). Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-48 (g3) and 15-49 (g5) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g3), even during the change of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in an manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), a group notice effect is executed as a notice effect during the jackpot fluctuation. The group notice effect is a specific symbol when an object such as a character appears on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or at a time, making it difficult to see the reach symbol, and then the object disappears. It is a production that makes a match (for example, 777) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes it difficult to see the design is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the effect image. Arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice, or the player promotes the small right-handed hit. The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the effect being slightly visible but the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed strike) cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g6), when a big hit (10R probability variation big hit) occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 issues a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. To send. Since the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Yattane !!") is displayed on the image display device 5. Or, a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be a lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), the name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS !!" in this example) showing the name of the jackpot gaming state that occurred after the fanfare effect was started is the image display device 5. It is displayed in the center of the screen, the sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. In addition, in the case of consecutive chan hits per special figure 2, since the large right-handed promotion effect has already been executed when the special figure 1 is hit, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further. , The frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right is continued. An image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as V notice effect, V aiming effect, and V winning effect are executed during the round as shown in FIGS. 15-40 to 15-46, and when the big hit round ends. , The ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 15-46 and 15-47. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-48, the probability change state after the big hit game state is controlled again. In this series of games, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and a fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display units 075F055 of the unit 075F050 keeps lighting. Eventually, when the probability change state after the big hit game state ends and the normal state is controlled without the big hit occurring, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display / off designation command to the effect control CPU 120 for the effect control. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Turn off each of the parts 075F055. As a result, the player will hit the left again in the normal state.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from power failure]
FIG. 15-51 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the fanfare effect according to the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power failure shown in FIG. 15-51 assumes a power failure 1 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare effect and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15-51, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" in this example) is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-24 (c2)). (State), only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-28 (c14)), and the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is "right-handed! If a power failure occurs in any of the states in which the character image of "!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A101 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A101 command), the effect image in 1R as shown in FIGS. 15-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!"), and a name image showing the name of the big hit gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS !!"). (Character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed !!" added to the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if there is a power failure before the large right-handed promotion effect is executed or before the large right-handed promotion effect is completed, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on. Therefore, at the very least, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right immediately after recovering from the power failure, and he forgets to hit right and cannot usually let the game ball enter the big prize opening. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player from being given to the player as much as possible.

FIG. 15-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power failure shown in FIGS. 15-52 assumes a power failure 2 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-52, when the power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. If a prize ball is obtained during the subsequent round, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, for example, 10 pt is added for every 10 pieces obtained. The point image is not limited to the one displayed at 0 pt after recovering from the power failure, and the point may not be known by the predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 15-53 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-53 causes the power supply 3 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-53, when a power failure occurs while an image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player is hit right. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit right and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round as much as possible. can.

FIG. 15-54 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power failure shown in FIGS. 15-54 assumes a power failure 4 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-54, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestion effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIGS. 15-41 (e7)), the image is displayed. After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A103 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured to.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 15-55 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-20, the power interruption shown in FIGS. 15-55 means that the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R, and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-55, when a power failure occurs in a state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-42 (e9)) during the round after 2R, the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A103 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured to.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player is hit right. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit right and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round as much as possible. can.

FIG. 15-56 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after 3 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-56 causes the power supply 6 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-56, when a power failure occurs in a state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-43 (e13)) during the round after 3R, the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A104 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the effect aiming at V as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control is performed. Based on the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, the CPU 120 aims at V as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e14) and executes an effect. It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player is hit right. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 15-57 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the four rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power failure shown in FIGS. 15-57 assumes a power failure 7 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-57, an image corresponding to the effect of aiming at V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. Is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-44 (e16)), and if a power failure occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to "recover ...". The character image of is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R as shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done. Further, when a power failure occurs while aiming at V and performing a small right-handed promotion effect as in 4R, and as shown in FIG. 15-51 described above, a small right-handed promotion effect is performed. In the case where a power failure occurs while executing the right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed while the effect aiming at V or the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed after recovering from the power failure in common with each other. Is at least running. Therefore, in a manner common to all situations, it is possible to urge the player to hit right at least immediately after recovering from the power failure.

FIG. 15-58 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after 4 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 15-58 causes the power supply 8 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 15-58, when an electric power failure occurs in a state (state of FIGS. 15-45 (e18)) in which an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 between rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the CPU 103 receives the special winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player is hit right. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit right and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round as much as possible. can.

FIG. 15-59 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the final round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power failure shown in FIG. 15-59 assumes a power failure 9 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 15-59, the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 15). When a power failure occurs in the state of −46 (e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of “Recovering…” is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it becomes the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIGS. 15-46 (f1).

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the final round of the big hit, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player is asked. It is possible to encourage right-handed hits and prevent forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 15-60 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 15-21, the power failure shown in FIG. 15-60 assumes a power failure 10 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15-60, among the ending effects, an image for selecting a stage in a probable change state after a big hit game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-46 (f1)), a character. A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (state in FIG. 15-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the immersive suppression notification effect, and the result of the game in the jackpot game state are shown. The image of the game result is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-47 (f3)), and the image for preventing forgetting to remove the card owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. When a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (state of FIG. 15-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is performed by turning on the power. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting the lighting means.

After that, when there is a hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , Waits until the display result specification command (8C system command) and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are received, and when these commands are received, the hold storage number specification command (C1 system command, C2 system command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), FIG. 15-48 (g1). The image display device 5 displays the effect image corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when there is no hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the background designation command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) are received from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background is received. Based on the designated command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designated command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial symbol ("123" as the decorative symbol and the small symbol in this example) stopped. ..

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the ending, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so the player is at least right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to urge the player to do so, and prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to win the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the big hit game state by forgetting to hit right. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by the feature unit 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature unit 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute a right-handed suggestion effect or an effect aiming at V by the CPU 120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). Equipped with
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to an effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed while the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state is being executed. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
After that, while the first guide display is terminated, the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the third guide display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guide display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13). The part that displays the image corresponding to the production and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, even after the game medium is in a state where it cannot enter the specific area and the game medium is in a state where it can enter the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e16), V is aimed at and produced. The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the display is being performed, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIGS. 15-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57. The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute a right-handed suggestion effect or an effect aiming at V by the CPU 120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). Equipped with
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to an effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed while the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state is being executed. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
After that, in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-38 (d1), (d2). ), The part that ends the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect while continuing the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area (for example, FIGS. 15-44 (for example, FIG. 15-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e16)). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to the effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the display is being performed, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIGS. 15-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57. The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute a right-handed suggestion effect or an effect aiming at V by the CPU 120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). Equipped with
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to an effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 15-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed while the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state is being executed. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
After that, by receiving the 1R open command (for example, the command for designating the opening of the large winning opening (A101 command)), the first guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-38). (D1), (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated, while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),.
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R is completed (for example, a command designated after opening the large winning opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the command for designating the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIGS. 15-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the production aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, by receiving the V passage command (for example, the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-44). As shown in (e16), the part that aims at V and ends the image display corresponding to the effect while continuing the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the display is being performed, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIGS. 15-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57. The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. It is possible to make sure that the player is recognized, and then, while ending the large right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is continued as it is so as not to appeal to the player excessively right-handed hitting. In addition, the production of aiming for V to aim at the V big winning opening is executed from the time when the V big winning opening is still closed, and by continuing as it is even after the V big winning opening is opened, V It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming at the big winning opening and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning opening. Further, after the V prize is generated and the V large prize opening is closed, by aiming at V and ending the production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving unnecessary promotion notification. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is always required to hit right-handed even after the V-winning occurs before the V-large winning opening is opened. Can be prompted. This makes it possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit right. In addition, when an electric power failure occurs while the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the effect is supported by aiming at V. In both cases when a power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the text image of "Recovering ..." and the small image after the power is turned on. Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to at least urge the player to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if a power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24 (for example). Including the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in c1).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the first guide display and the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare effect) are being executed. The second guidance display is performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)).
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-39 (e1) to 15-46 (e21)). The part that does not display the image corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect during the round, but continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after a big hit as shown in FIGS. 15-48 and 15-49). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect in the probable change state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 15-38 (d1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out).
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group notice effect) (for example, the image display by the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 15-49 (g5)). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by.

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. Make sure to recognize it, and during the subsequent big hit round, end the big right-handed promotion effect while continuing the small right-handed promotion effect so as not to appeal to the player excessively right-handed. Can be done. Further, by continuously executing the small right-handed promotion effect even in the probable change state or the time-saving state after the big hit game state is completed, it is possible to encourage the player to always hit right. Furthermore, after a big hit occurs, the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the big hit round after the fanfare effect is executed does not affect the small right-handed promotion effect, and the big hit game state is Since the small right-handed promotion effect is not affected by the image display such as the group notice effect performed in the probable change state or the time-saving state after the end, the player can always be encouraged to hit right. This makes it possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120),
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, promotion of large right-handed strike). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state which is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is performed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, for displaying an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamp is turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with it twice),
The sound output means is
Of the plurality of guidance emissions, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance emission (for example, FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24). ), The part where the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect).
Of the plurality of guided light emissions, when the final guided light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c26) to 15-33 (c29). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan big hit per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not output sound in the mode).

Specifically, after a big hit occurs, the player is first urged to make a conservative right-handed hit by executing a small right-handed promotion effect, and then a name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in the manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting part of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion. The BGM in the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed strike to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. This makes it possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120),
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, promotion of large right-handed strike). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state which is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, for displaying an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamp is turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with it twice),
The sound output means is
Of the plurality of guidance emissions, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance emission (for example, FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24). ), The part where the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect).
Of the plurality of guided light emissions, when the final guided light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c26) to 15-33 (c29). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In the guidance means, the display result of the variable display is displayed in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed. When the specific display result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan big hit per special figure 2, the frame lamp promotes a large right-handed strike. The part that does not light up according to the mode).

Specifically, after a big hit occurs, the player is first urged to make a conservative right-handed hit by executing a small right-handed promotion effect, and then a name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in the manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting part of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion. The BGM in the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed strike to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed strike is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not turned on in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. This makes it possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120),
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, promotion of large right-handed strike). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state which is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is performed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after the light emitting means is turned off (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, the light is turned off once and then hit to the right. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to FIGS. As shown in 15-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan big hit per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R are used to promote a large right-handed hit. The part that does not output sound in the corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a big hit occurs, the player is first urged to make a conservative right-handed hit by executing a small right-handed promotion effect, and then a name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in the manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting part of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Furthermore, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. This makes it possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that prompts the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display (for example, an image display for prompting a right-handed strike). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120),
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, promotion of large right-handed strike). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state which is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is performed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means is
After turning off the light emitting means, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, after the light is turned off once, it corresponds to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan big hit around the special figure 2, the frame lamp responds to the big right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light in the mode).

Specifically, after a big hit occurs, the player is first urged to make a conservative right-handed hit by executing a small right-handed promotion effect, and then a name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in the manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting part of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Furthermore, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed strike is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not turned on in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. This makes it possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a mode that is emphasized rather than the name display of the advantageous state that is a part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the large right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2). In addition, characters appear step by step, and the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he is hitting right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means is
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed on the way.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second time. Regarding the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. At the same time, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onward. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. You can hear it.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means is
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed on the way.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then to the right. The sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the striking promotion, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. Sound is output and no sound is output in conjunction with the third right-handed promotion. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to each of the first and second right-handed promotion. Note that the sound data includes only sound data linked to one right-handed promotion, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. .. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice. .. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. You can hear it.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, FIG. 15-25 (c3)). As shown in the above, the part where all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off once and then the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect).

Specifically, since all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, the player is encouraged to strike right-handed more easily and effectively. Can be done.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guided light in conjunction with the first guide display based on the data specified by the lighting data table.
The lighting data table is a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIGS. 15-34) that defines the execution time of the guided light emission, and a child table (for example, a child table) that indicates a grandchild table in which the data referred to by the light emitting means is defined. , The child table shown in FIG. 15-35) and the grandchild table (eg, the child table shown in FIGS. 15-36, 15-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined by referring to the child table. Turn on / blink / turn off by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently turned on in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not perform the guided light emitting is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the large right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so that a grandchild table is provided. No. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means toward the direction in which the player fires the game medium (for example, FIGS. 15-25 to 15-). As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, by sequentially lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp from the left side to the right side of the game area, a large right-handed promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide light emits the guide light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a portion for lighting the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-handed promotion effect while being lit in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the fade-in and fade-out switching display as the background image switching display performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-38 (d1)). ~ As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) to 15-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion effect switches the background image by fading in and fading out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round. Continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the big hit round by the switching display of the background image, it is possible to encourage the player to continue to hit right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 15). As shown in −49 (g5), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), the small right-handed promotion effect affects the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a big hit will occur in the probable change state after the big hit advantageous state ends. Continued without being done. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the advance notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right-handed promotion effect continue to be displayed without impairing the visibility. You can encourage the player to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2)). As described above, in the case of continuous chan per special figure 2, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first hit. Does not output sound with, or the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by promoting right-handed striking in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modification example of feature section 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-mentioned feature unit 075F will be described.

(About turning off the lights before executing the big right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , Not limited to turning off all the lamps, some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the large right-handed promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

(About switching display during big hit round)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) to 15-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are performed. Although it is exemplified that the switching display of the background image is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, an effect such as a whiteout that inserts a pure white screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout that inserts a pure black screen may be used.

Further, as the switching display during the big hit round, a BGM selection screen for selecting a BGM (musical piece) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be displayed.

Further, as the switching display during the big hit round, a mode selection screen for selecting the effect mode may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen may be displayed.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big hit round, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the display of the production image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, a whiteout effect of inserting a pure white screen during the reach effect or a blackout effect of inserting a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or it is difficult to see the decorative pattern by turning on or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the effect of making it. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the production aiming at V)
In the present embodiment, as a specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified, and V is aimed at as an effect. As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the production aiming at V, which is the third guidance display using the image display relating to a specific area, is not limited to the one that points to the V big winning opening itself, but the one that points to the vicinity of the V big winning opening. It may also point to a route leading to the V-large winning opening, for example, a lid portion for opening and closing the V-large winning opening located on the upstream side of the V-large winning opening.

(About the big right-handed promotion production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-31 (c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed !!" appears. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the character image of "Right-handed !!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. Then, it may be composed of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About advantageous condition)
In the present embodiment, as the period of the "advantageous state", the period shown in FIGS. 15-24 (c1) to 15-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 15-20 to t16 in FIG. 15-21). ), But it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is a period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, a period shown in FIGS. 15-39 (d3) to 15-47 (f4) (t4 to 15-21 in FIG. 15-20). The period up to t16) may be used. Further, the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect may be executed during the period (symbol determination period) in which the symbol in which the big hit occurs is determined.

(About right-handed promotion production in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit per special figure 1, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. It was lit with, but it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of the big hit in the special figure 1. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the jackpot per special figure 1 is a probabilistic jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output depending on the mode. Further, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a sound in the manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. May not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chans per special figure 2)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan per special figure 2, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

Further, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of continuous chan per special figure 2. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the continuous chan hit in Special Figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R change to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. Further, when the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speaker 8L, 8R corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. You may not output the sound with. When the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, unlike the first hit in the special figure 1, the frame lamp has a special mode (for example, gold or seven colors, etc.) according to the large right-handed promotion effect. ), Or the sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special mode according to the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right-handed promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit in the special figure 1. ..

(About the 3rd guidance display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display relating to the specific area, an image pointing to the V big winning opening is exemplified during the big hit round in the probabilistic big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the big hit game state is finished, or the variable winning ball It may be applied to display an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), a symbol variation specification command (8D system command), and a display result from the CPU 103. Based on the reception of the designated command (8C series command) and the fluctuation pattern designation command (81 series command), "Aim!" With an arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). The character image of "" may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image is displayed, the graphic and character images in the small right-handed promotion effect may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 7 is illustrated. It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, a lottery may be executed using a dedicated random number for time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a lost symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed by using other random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure and the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The big hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time-saving symbol is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving is already in the state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-reduced end symbol (time-reduced end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-reduced times may be set to the number of times until the time-reduced end symbol is derived and displayed after the time-reduced start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the reduced working hours state, the pachinko gaming machine always goes through the big hit gaming state. I was able to perform the big right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare effect that is executed when a big hit occurs. However, when the lost symbol as described above is used as the time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure a time for executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect between the time when the symbol is displayed and the time when it is controlled to the reduced working hours. Therefore, the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect may be executed by the following methods.

For example, when the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of the lost symbol that is not the time-saving symbol stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the lost symbol that is the time-saving symbol stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. In the meantime, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of control in the time-saving state. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C system command), the CPU 103 has a time reduction for time reduction, which is different from the display result specification command indicating a normal loss variation in which the time reduction is not given as a loss specification command. A display result designation command indicating the above may be prepared, and the effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 by using both commands properly depending on whether or not the time saving symbol is lost. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol determination time if it receives a display result designation command indicating a loss variation for shortening the time. May be 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, “time saving RUSH”) indicating the name of the time saving state on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound is output in the corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. A part of the time-saving fanfare effect can be made to correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1), even before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) produced by the time saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time saving state (for example, “O”). The text image of "Medeto !!") is displayed on the image display device 5, the sound to congratulate the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting to congratulate the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to be a mode. In addition, as a small right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (character of "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5. The right-handed sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may be changed to the right-handed display unit (lighting). The image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both are urging the player to hit right for the same period.

After that, as in the example shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2), the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed while the name image (“time-saving RUSH”) produced by the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then FIG. 15-25. After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), a large right-handed strike is promoted during the time-saving fanfare production as in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26). You may perform the production. During this time, the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed promotion effect may be continued as in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-48 to 15-50.

In this way, even when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time longer than the symbol confirmation time of the lost symbol that is not the time reduction symbol, the symbol confirmation time is greatly improved. It is possible to execute a striking promotion effect and a small right-handed striking promotion effect.

In addition, when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, the time reduction is not limited to the one that executes the large right-handed promotion effect or the small right-handed promotion effect by using the symbol confirmation time as described above. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (variation) of the game whose design is fixed, in the next game (variation), the time-saving fanfare effect is executed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right are performed. You may perform a striking promotion effect. Specifically, if the next game (variation) of the game in which the loss pattern is confirmed is a loss change, the time-saving fanfare effect is instead performed without performing the effect that expects a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect. At the same time, a large right-handed promotion effect or a small right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol is confirmed is a big hit, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1) is executed, so that the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no hold memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare effect is executed while the symbol is not changed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and the time saving fanfare effect not being disturbed, the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is not transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. .. Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare effect without executing the customer wait demonstration effect.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A 1st special symbol display device, 4B 2nd special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative symbol display area, 6A winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start port switch, 23 count switch, 25A 1st hold indicator, 25B 2nd hold indicator, 25C normal figure hold indicator, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 pass gate, 81,82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, the special suggestion effect and the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect having a lower expectation of being controlled by the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. , A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including the fourth suggestion effect,
It is notified that the special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified, and that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. After that, a development effect execution means that can execute a special development effect different from the special development effect as a second development pattern,
At least, a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect, and
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display is displayed to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path by using an image display. Guidance display means to be performed and
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect.
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed.
As the development suggestion effect, the development suggestion effect execution means performs the special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect. It is feasible in either case
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production.
The special development effect includes a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect that is executed after the first effect and in which the previous stage information is visibly displayed, and the second effect. Including the third effect, which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which the latter stage information having a higher degree of emphasis than the first stage information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images